summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt7297
1 files changed, 4659 insertions, 2638 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
index e502e516666..a2966568b6d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
@@ -47,6 +47,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
5.3 '\flushbottom'
5.4 '\raggedbottom'
5.5 Page layout parameters
+ 5.6 Floats
6 Sectioning
7 Cross references
7.1 '\label'
@@ -64,7 +65,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
8.8 'eqnarray'
8.9 'equation'
8.10 'figure'
- 8.11 'filecontents': Create external files
+ 8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
8.12 'flushleft'
8.12.1 '\raggedright'
8.13 'flushright'
@@ -89,27 +90,26 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
8.19.12 '\put'
8.19.13 '\shortstack'
8.19.14 '\vector'
- 8.20 'quotation'
- 8.21 'quote'
- 8.22 'tabbing'
- 8.23 'table'
- 8.24 'tabular'
- 8.24.1 '\multicolumn'
- 8.24.2 '\cline'
- 8.24.3 '\hline'
- 8.24.4 '\vline'
- 8.25 'thebibliography'
- 8.25.1 '\bibitem'
- 8.25.2 '\cite'
- 8.25.3 '\nocite'
- 8.25.4 Using BibTeX
- 8.26 'theorem'
- 8.27 'titlepage'
- 8.28 'verbatim'
- 8.28.1 '\verb'
- 8.29 'verse'
+ 8.20 'quotation' and 'quote'
+ 8.21 'tabbing'
+ 8.22 'table'
+ 8.23 'tabular'
+ 8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
+ 8.23.2 '\vline'
+ 8.23.3 '\cline'
+ 8.23.4 '\hline'
+ 8.24 'thebibliography'
+ 8.24.1 '\bibitem'
+ 8.24.2 '\cite'
+ 8.24.3 '\nocite'
+ 8.24.4 Using BibTeX
+ 8.25 'theorem'
+ 8.26 'titlepage'
+ 8.27 'verbatim'
+ 8.27.1 '\verb'
+ 8.28 'verse'
9 Line breaking
- 9.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE]
+ 9.1 '\\'
9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
9.3 '\newline'
9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
@@ -127,17 +127,21 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
11.1 '\footnote'
11.2 '\footnotemark'
11.3 '\footnotetext'
- 11.4 Symbolic footnotes
- 11.5 Footnote parameters
+ 11.4 Footnotes in a table
+ 11.5 Footnotes in section headings
+ 11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
+ 11.7 Multiple references to footnotes
+ 11.8 Footnote parameters
12 Definitions
12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
- 12.2 '\newcounter'
- 12.3 '\newlength'
- 12.4 '\newsavebox'
- 12.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
- 12.6 '\newtheorem'
- 12.7 '\newfont'
- 12.8 '\protect'
+ 12.2 '\providecommand'
+ 12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
+ 12.4 '\newlength': Allocating a length
+ 12.5 '\newsavebox': Allocating a box
+ 12.6 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+ 12.7 '\newtheorem'
+ 12.8 '\newfont': Define a new font (obsolete)
+ 12.9 '\protect'
13 Counters
13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
@@ -148,12 +152,13 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
14 Lengths
- 14.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
- 14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
- 14.3 '\settodepth'
- 14.4 '\settoheight'
- 14.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
- 14.6 Predefined lengths
+ 14.1 Units of length
+ 14.2 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
+ 14.3 '\addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}'
+ 14.4 '\settodepth'
+ 14.5 '\settoheight'
+ 14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
+ 14.7 Predefined lengths
15 Making paragraphs
15.1 '\indent'
15.2 '\noindent'
@@ -175,16 +180,16 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
19 Spaces
19.1 '\hspace'
19.2 '\hfill'
- 19.3 '\SPACE': Normal interword space
- 19.4 '\@': Force sentence-ending punctuation
- 19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
- 19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction
- 19.7 '\hrulefill'
- 19.8 '\dotfill'
+ 19.3 '\(SPACE)' and \@
+ 19.4 '\ ' after a control sequence
+ 19.5 '\frenchspacing'
+ 19.6 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
+ 19.7 '\/': Insert italic correction
+ 19.8 '\hrulefill \dotfill'
19.9 '\addvspace'
19.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
19.11 '\vfill'
- 19.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}'
+ 19.12 '\vspace{LENGTH}'
20 Boxes
20.1 '\mbox{TEXT}'
20.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox'
@@ -205,27 +210,25 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
22 Splitting the input
22.1 '\include'
22.2 \'includeonly'
- 22.3 \input
+ 22.3 '\input'
23 Front/back matter
23.1 Tables of contents
- 23.1.1 \addcontentsline
- 23.1.2 \addtocontents
+ 23.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
+ 23.1.2 '\addtocontents'
23.2 Glossaries
23.3 Indexes
24 Letters
- 24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS}
+ 24.1 '\address'
24.2 '\cc'
24.3 '\closing'
24.4 '\encl'
24.5 '\location'
24.6 '\makelabels'
24.7 '\name'
- 24.8 '\opening{TEXT}'
+ 24.8 '\opening'
24.9 '\ps'
- 24.10 '\signature{TEXT}'
- 24.11 '\startbreaks'
- 24.12 '\stopbreaks'
- 24.13 '\telephone'
+ 24.10 '\signature'
+ 24.11 '\telephone'
25 Terminal input/output
25.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}'
25.2 '\typeout{MSG}'
@@ -239,8 +242,8 @@ Command Index
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
***************************************
-This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of May 2015)
-for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of October
+2015) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
1 About this document
*********************
@@ -298,8 +301,8 @@ interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
that interface with Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program (the
technical term is that LaTeX is a "macro package" for the TeX engine).
-The user produces the output document by giving that file to the TeX
-engine.
+The user produces the output document by giving that input file to the
+TeX engine.
The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
@@ -313,8 +316,8 @@ plain text, write it as 'LaTeX'.
2.1 Starting and ending
=======================
-LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard starting and
-ending. Here is a "hello, world" example:
+LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. Here is a "hello, world" example:
\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
@@ -331,8 +334,9 @@ the '\begin{document}' commands. This area is called the "preamble".
The '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' is a so-called
"environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
-all LaTeX documents. LaTeX provides many environments itself, and many
-more are defined separately. *Note Environments::.
+all LaTeX documents (*note document::). LaTeX provides many
+environments itself, and many more are defined separately. *Note
+Environments::.
The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output
from a LaTeX input file.
@@ -392,7 +396,7 @@ of the main programs.
'latex'
'pdflatex'
- In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>, if LaTeX is invoked via
+ In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX
engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>). When invoked as
'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main
@@ -402,7 +406,7 @@ of the main programs.
program (<http://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the
- command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
+ system command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
In other TeX distributions, 'latex' may invoke e-TeX rather than
pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be
@@ -419,12 +423,17 @@ of the main programs.
'xelatex'
If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX
- engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX also
+ engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts,
though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
'.pdf' file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+ Internally, XeTeX creates an '.xdv' file, a variant of DVI, and
+ translates that to PDF using the ('x')'dvipdfmx' program, but this
+ process is automatic. The '.xdv' file is only useful for
+ debugging.
+
Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide additional
support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
<http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex>, <http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>).
@@ -432,26 +441,67 @@ support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
2.4 LaTeX command syntax
========================
-In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a '\'; the name
-itself then consists of either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single
-non-letter.
+In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, '\'. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
+letters or (b) a single non-letter.
+
+ LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that '\pagebreak' differs
+from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command). Most commands
+are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same
+case as they are defined.
- A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments, either
-required or optional. Required arguments are contained in curly braces,
-'{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in square brackets, '[...]'.
-Generally, but not universally, if the command accepts an optional
-argument, it comes first, before any required arguments.
+ A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, '{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in
+square brackets, '[...]'. Generally, but not universally, if the
+command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any
+required arguments.
- Some commands have a '*' form that is related to the form without a
-'*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
+ Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket (']') hide it inside curly braces, as in '\item[closing bracket
+{]}]'. Similarly, if an optional argument comes last, with no required
+argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
+text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.
- LaTeX commands are case sensitive; neither '\Begin{document}' nor
-'\begin{Document}' will work. Most commands are lowercase, but in any
-event you must enter all commands in the same case as they are defined.
+ LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a '*' form that is
+related to the form without a '*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
+The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the
commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+ ..
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+
+ An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
+'\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ..
+ \end{verse}
+
+ The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
+star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.
+
+ Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
+ .. rows of table ..
+ \end{tabular}
+
+A command that changes the value, or changes the meaning, of some other
+command or parameter. For instance, the '\mainmatter' command changes
+the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic.
+
3 Document classes
******************
@@ -472,6 +522,9 @@ document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
(*note Front/back matter::).
+'letter'
+ Mail, optionally including mailing labels (*note Letters::).
+
'report'
For documents of length between an 'article' and a 'book', such as
technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
@@ -500,9 +553,29 @@ options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'):
10pt 11pt 12pt
All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
-paper size (default is 'letterpaper'):
+paper size (these show height by width):
+
+'a4paper'
+ 210 by 297 mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
- a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+'b5paper'
+ 176 by 250 mm (about 7 by 9.875 inches)
+
+'executivepaper'
+ 7.25 by 10.5 inches
+
+'legalpaper'
+ 8.5 by 14 inches
+
+'letterpaper'
+ 8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
+
+ When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (*note
+TeX engines::), options other than 'letterpaper' set the print area but
+you must also set the physical paper size. One way to do that is to put
+'\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth' and '\pdfpageheight=\paperheight' in your
+document's preamble. The 'geometry' package provides flexible ways of
+setting the print area and physical page size.
Miscellaneous other options:
@@ -579,10 +652,10 @@ style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.
The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
This first group of commands is typically used with an argument, as
-in '\textit{italic text}'. In the table below, the corresponding
-command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which takes no
-arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type
-style command or the end of the current group.
+in '\textit{TEXT}'. In the table below, the corresponding command in
+parenthesis is the "declaration form", which takes no arguments, as in
+'{\itshape TEXT}'. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
+next type style command or the end of the current group.
These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
are cumulative; e.g., you can say either '\sffamily\bfseries' or
@@ -605,9 +678,6 @@ such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
'\textit (\itshape)'
Italics.
-'\emph'
- Emphasis (switches between '\textit' and '\textrm').
-
'\textmd (\mdseries)'
Medium weight (default).
@@ -615,7 +685,7 @@ such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
Boldface.
'\textup (\upshape)'
- Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ Upright (default).
'\textsl (\slshape)'
Slanted.
@@ -632,45 +702,15 @@ such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
'\textnormal (\normalfont)'
Main document font.
-'\mathrm'
- Roman, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathbf'
- Boldface, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathsf'
- Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathtt'
- Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathit'
-'(\mit)'
- Italics, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathnormal'
- For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
-
-'\mathcal'
- 'Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
-
- In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
-switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
-'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
-
- Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
-"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
-sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals. LaTeX's default
-fonts support this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles;
-there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other
-fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package
-must be loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them
-the default. FAQ entry:
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.
+ Although it also changes fonts, the '\emph{TEXT}' command is
+semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for '\textit'. For example, '\emph{START TEXT \emph{MIDDLE
+TEXT} END TEXT}' will result in the START TEXT and END TEXT in italics,
+but MIDDLE TEXT will be in roman.
LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. Also, they
-are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD ...}' instead of
+are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD...}' instead of
'\CMD{...}'. These are two unrelated constructs.
'\bf'
@@ -679,9 +719,6 @@ are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD ...}' instead of
'\cal'
Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
-'\em'
- Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics).
-
'\it'
Italics.
@@ -700,12 +737,56 @@ are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD ...}' instead of
'\tt'
Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
- Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
-as '\tt', obsolete and _only_ the cumulative commands ('\texttt') should
-be used. I (Karl) do not agree. There are perfectly reasonable
-situations when an unconditional font switch is precisely what you need
-to get the desired output; for one example, *note 'description':
-description. Both sets of commands have their place.
+ The '\em' command is the unconditional version of '\emph'.
+
+ (Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
+as '\tt', obsolete and that only the cumulative commands ('\texttt')
+should be used. Others think that both sets of commands have their
+place and sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely what you
+want; for one example, *note 'description': description.)
+
+ The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so '\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}' does not create a boldface and
+italic SYMBOL; instead, it will just be in italics. This is because
+typically math symbols need consistent typographic treatment, regardless
+of the surrounding environment.
+
+'\mathrm'
+ Roman, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathbf'
+ Boldface, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathsf'
+ Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathtt'
+ Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathit'
+'(\mit)'
+ Italics, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathnormal'
+ For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+
+'\mathcal'
+ Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+
+ In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
+
+ Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
+"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
+sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
+the same height as upper-case letters. LaTeX's default fonts support
+this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles; there are no
+italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other fonts have
+old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package must be
+loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them the
+default. FAQ entry:
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.
4.2 Font sizes
==============
@@ -740,178 +821,394 @@ These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
ones.
-'\fontencoding{enc}'
- Select font encoding. Valid encodings include 'OT1' and 'T1'.
-
-'\fontfamily{family}'
- Select font family. Valid families include:
-
- * 'cmr' for Computer Modern Roman
- * 'cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif
- * 'cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter
-
- and numerous others.
-
-'\fontseries{series}'
- Select font series. Valid series include:
-
- * 'm' Medium (normal)
- * 'b' Bold
- * 'c' Condensed
- * 'bc' Bold condensed
- * 'bx' Bold extended
-
- and various other combinations.
-
-'\fontshape{shape}'
+'\fontencoding{ENCODING}'
+ Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There
+ are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are 'OT1',
+ Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+ 'T1', also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+ accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+ (German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
+ hyphenate words containing accented letters.
+
+'\fontfamily{FAMILY}'
+ Select the font family. The web page
+ <http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse
+ through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are
+ examples of some common families:
+
+ 'pag' Avant Garde
+ 'fvs' Bitstream Vera Sans
+ 'pbk' Bookman
+ 'bch' Charter
+ 'ccr' Computer Concrete
+ 'cmr' Computer Modern
+ 'pcr' Courier
+ 'phv' Helvetica
+ 'fi4' Inconsolata
+ 'lmr' Latin Modern
+ 'lmss' Latin Modern Sans
+ 'lmtt' Latin Modern Typewriter
+ 'pnc' New Century Schoolbook
+ 'ppl' Palatino
+ 'ptm' Times
+ 'uncl' Uncial
+ 'put' Utopia
+ 'pzc' Zapf Chancery
+
+'\fontseries{SERIES}'
+ Select the font series. A "series" combines a "weight" and a
+ "width". Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+ combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'c' Condensed
+ 'bc' Bold condensed
+ 'bx' Bold extended
+
+ The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+
+ 'ul' Ultra light
+ 'el' Extra light
+ 'l' Light
+ 'sl' Semi light
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'sb' Semi bold
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'eb' Extra bold
+ 'ub' Ultra bold
+
+ The possible values for width, individually, are (the percentages
+ are just guides and are not followed precisely by all fonts):
+
+ 'uc' Ultra condensed, 50%
+ 'ec' Extra condensed, 62.5%
+ 'c' Condensed, 75%
+ 'sc' Semi condensed, 87.5%
+ 'm' Medium, 100%
+ 'sx' Semi expanded, 112.5%
+ 'x' Expanded, 125%
+ 'ex' Extra expanded, 150%
+ 'ux' Ultra expanded, 200%
+
+ When forming the SERIES string from the weight and width, drop the
+ 'm' that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+ weight and width are 'm', in which case use just one (''m'').
+
+'\fontshape{SHAPE}'
Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
- * 'n' Upright (normal)
- * 'it' Italic
- * 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
- * 'sc' Small caps
- * 'ui' Upright italics
- * 'ol' Outline
-
- The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
-
-'\fontsize{size}{skip}'
- Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to
- and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a
- parameter named '\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters
- defaults to pt. The default '\baselineskip' for the Computer
- Modern typeface is 1.2 times the '\fontsize'.
-
- The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the
- '\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the
- default is 1. However, the best way to "double space" a document,
- if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use
- the 'setspace' package; see
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace>.
+ 'n' Upright (normal)
+ 'it' Italic
+ 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
+ 'sc' Small caps
+ 'ui' Upright italics
+ 'ol' Outline
+
+ The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+ small caps are often missing as well.
+
+'\fontsize{SIZE}{SKIP}'
+ Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both
+ parameters defaults to points ('pt'). The line spacing is the
+ nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is
+ stored in the parameter '\baselineskip'. The default
+ '\baselineskip' for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
+ '\fontsize'. Changing '\baselineskip' directly is inadvisable
+ since its value is reset every time a size change happens; see
+ '\baselinestretch', next.
+
+'\baselinestretch'
+ LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+ '\baselinestretch' parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+ takes effect when '\selectfont' (see below) is called. You can
+ make line skip changes happen for the entire document by doing
+ '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}' in the preamble.
+
+ However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+ 'setspace' package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+ options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in
+ places where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and
+ figure captions. See the package documentation.
'\linespread{FACTOR}'
Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as
- described just above.
+ just described.
- The changes made by calling the font commands described above do
- not come into effect until '\selectfont' is called.
+'\selectfont'
+ The effects of the font commands described above do not happen
+ until '\selectfont' is called, as in
+ '\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont'. It is often useful to put
+ this in a macro:
+ '\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont}'
+ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
-'\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}'
+'\usefont{ENC}{FAMILY}{SERIES}{SHAPE}'
The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries'
and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
- '\selectfont'.
+ '\selectfont'. For example:
+
+ \usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}
5 Layout
********
-Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
+Commands for controlling the general page layout.
5.1 '\onecolumn'
================
The '\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output. This is the default.
+single-column output. If the document is given the class option
+'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior (*note Document class
+options::).
+
+ This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
5.2 '\twocolumn'
================
Synopsis:
- \twocolumn[TEXT1COL]
+ \twocolumn[PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT]
The '\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is
+two-column output. If the document is given the class option
+'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note Document class options::).
+
+ If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
+ This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
'\columnsep'
- The distance between columns (35pt by default).
+ The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with
+ a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}' You must change it
+ before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+ place.
'\columnseprule'
- The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there
- is no rule.
+ The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway
+ between the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is
+ no rule. Change it with a command such as
+ '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column
+ environment starts.
'\columnwidth'
- The width of the current column; this is equal to '\textwidth' in
- single-column text.
+ The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+ '\textwidth'. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
+ of each of the two columns to be half of '\textwidth' minus
+ '\columnsep'.
- These parameters control float behavior in two-column output:
+ In a two-column document, the starred environments 'table*' and
+'figure*' are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+'table' and 'figure' take up only one column (*note figure:: and *note
+table::). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page. The
+following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
'\dbltopfraction'
- Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
- occupied by floats. Default '.7', can be usefully redefined to
- (say) '.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+ The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+ occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning
+ that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
+ exceed '0.7\textheight' . If the height of your starred float
+ environment exceeeds this then you can take one of the following
+ actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
+ document:
+
+ * Use the '[tp]' location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+ the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of
+ a page.
+
+ * Use the '[t!]' location specifier to override the effect of
+ '\dbltopfraction' for this particular float.
+
+ * Increase the value of '\dbltopfraction' to a suitably large
+ number, to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+
+ You can redefine it, for instance with
+ '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.
'\dblfloatpagefraction'
- The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
- floats, for a two-column float page. Default '.5'.
+ For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
+ fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of
+ blank space. LaTeX's default is '0.5'. Change it with
+ '\renewcommand'.
'\dblfloatsep'
- Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float
- page. Default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt'
- documents, '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for '12pt'.
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the
+ distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.
+ The default is '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for a document set at '10pt'
+ or '11pt', and '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for a document set at
+ '12pt'.
'\dbltextfloatsep'
- Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a
- page and the main text. Default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+ This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top
+ or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is '20pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+'\dbltopnumber'
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+ maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
+ default is '2'.
+
+ This example shows the use of the optional argument of '\twocolumn'
+to create a title that spans the two-column article:
+
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ \newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+ \begin{document}
+ \twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
+
+ Two column text here.
5.3 '\flushbottom'
==================
-The '\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height,
-adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page.
+The '\flushbottom' command can go at any point in the document body. It
+makes all later pages the same height, stretching the vertical space
+where necessary to fill out the page.
- This is the default if 'twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document
-class options::).
+ If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like 'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active'. You can change to '\raggedbottom'
+(see below). Alternatively, you can try to adjust the 'textheight' to
+be compatible, or you can add some vertical stretch glue between lines
+or between paragraphs, as in '\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'. In
+a final editing stage you can adjust the height of individual pages
+(*note \enlargethispage::).
+
+ This is the default only if you select the 'twoside' document class
+option (*note Document class options::).
5.4 '\raggedbottom'
===================
-The '\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of
-the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.
+The '\raggedbottom' command can go at any point in the document body.
+It makes all later pages the natural height of the material on that
+page; no rubber lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. See also
+'\flushbottom' above.
+
+ This is the default unless you select the 'twoside' document class
+option (*note Document class options::).
5.5 Page layout parameters
==========================
+'\columnsep'
+'\columnseprule'
+'\columnwidth'
+ The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between
+ the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class
+ option 'twocolumn' is in effect (*note Document class options::).
+ *Note \twocolumn::.
+
'\headheight'
- Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is
- '30pt', except in the 'book' class, where it varies with the type
- size.
+ Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in
+ the 'article', 'report', and 'book' classes is '12pt', at all type
+ sizes.
'\headsep'
Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
- of the main text. Default is '25pt', except in the 'book' class,
- where it varies with the type size.
+ of the main text. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '25pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: if the
+ document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt and 12pt
+ it is '0.275in'.
'\footskip'
Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
- of the page footer. Default is '30pt', except in the 'book' class,
- where it varies with the type size.
+ of the page footer. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '30pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: when the
+ type size is 10pt the default is '0.35in', while at 11pt it is
+ '0.38in', and at 12pt it is '30pt'.
'\linewidth'
Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note
- list::). Specifically, it is smaller than '\textwidth' by the sum
- of '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note itemize::). The default
- varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For
- an 'article' document in '10pt', it's set to '345pt'; in two-column
- mode, that becomes '229.5pt'.
+ list::). That is, the nominal value for '\linewidth' is to equal
+ '\textwidth' but for each nested list the '\linewidth' is decreased
+ by the sum of that list's '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note
+ itemize::).
+
+'\marginparpush'
+'\marginsep'
+'\marginparwidth'
+ The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the
+ horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and
+ the horizontal width of the notes.
+
+ Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+ declaration '\reversemarginpar' changes that (and
+ '\normalmarginpar' changes it back).
+
+ The defaults for '\marginparpush' in both 'book' and 'article'
+ classes are: '7pt' if the document is set at 12pt, and '5pt' if the
+ document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+
+ For '\marginsep', in 'article' class the default is '10pt' except
+ if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode where the
+ default is '11pt'.
+
+ For '\marginsep' in 'book' class the default is '10pt' in
+ two-column mode and '7pt' in one-column mode.
+
+ For '\marginparwidth' in both 'book' and 'article' classes, in
+ two-column mode the default is 60% of '\paperwidth - \textwidth',
+ while in one-column mode it is 50% of that distance.
+
+'\oddsidemargin'
+'\evensidemargin'
+ The '\oddsidemargin' is the extra distance between the left side of
+ the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+ document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages when
+ 'oneside' is in effect. When 'twoside' is in effect, on
+ even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+ 'evensidemargin'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is that '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference
+ between '\paperwidth' and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is
+ the remainder.
+
+'\paperheight'
+ The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print
+ area. It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
+
+'\paperwidth'
+ The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print
+ area. It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
'\textheight'
- The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies
- with the font size, document class, etc. For an 'article' or
- 'report' document in '10pt', it's set to '43\baselineskip'; for
- 'book', it's '41\baselineskip'. For '11pt', it's '38\baselineskip'
- and for '12pt', '36\baselineskip'.
+ The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is
+ set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an 'article' or
+ 'report' the default is '43\baselineskip', while for a 'book' it is
+ '41\baselineskip'. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+ '38\baselineskip' for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+ '36\baselineskip' for all classes.
'\textwidth'
- The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default
- varies as usual. For an 'article' or 'report' document, it's
- '345pt' at '10pt', '360pt' at '11pt', and '390pt' at '12pt'. For a
- 'book' document, it's '4.5in' at '10pt', and '5in' at '11pt' or
- '12pt'.
+ The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+ 'article' or 'report' document, the default is '345pt' when the
+ chosen type size is 10pt, the default is '360pt' at 11pt, and it is
+ '390pt' at 12pt. For a 'book' document, the default is '4.5in' at
+ a type size of 10pt, and '5in' at 11pt or 12pt.
In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the
entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column
@@ -926,13 +1223,13 @@ the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.
specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.
- For completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX primitive parameter used when
- text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal LaTeX
- documents.
+ This entry is included for completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX
+ primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should
+ not be used in normal LaTeX documents.
'\topmargin'
Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
- paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is
+ paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is
computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in -
\headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided
by two.
@@ -940,7 +1237,157 @@ the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.
'\topskip'
Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default
- is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at '10pt'.
+ is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at a type size of 10pt.
+
+5.6 Floats
+==========
+
+Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+
+ LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, 'figure' (*note figure::) and 'table'
+(*note table::), but you can create a new class with the package
+'float'.
+
+ Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, LaTeX may mix the classes, so it can happen that while
+the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+
+ The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
+bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued up that the limits prevent
+them all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and defers
+the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may be typset far from
+their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big can
+migrate to the end of the document. But then because all floats in a
+class must appear in sequential order, every subsequent float in that
+class also appears at the end.
+
+ In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+PLACEMENT argument. The possible values are a sequence of the letters
+below. The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
+'book' classes, is 'tbp'.
+
+'t'
+ (Top)--at the top of a text page.
+
+'b'
+ (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. (However, 'b' is not
+ allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
+ output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
+ package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
+
+'h'
+ (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
+ appears. However, 'h' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
+ automatically added.
+
+ To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
+ '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
+ For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.
+
+'p'
+ (Page of floats)--on a separate "float page", which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+
+'!'
+ Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
+ ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
+ appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
+ page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
+ above.
+
+ Note: the order in which letters appear in the PLACEMENT argument
+does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float; for
+instance, 'btp' has the same effect as 'tbp'. All that PLACEMENT does
+is that if a letter is not present then the algorithm does not try that
+location. Thus, LaTeX's default of 'tbp' is to try every location
+except placing the float where it occurs in the source.
+
+ To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a '\clearpage' command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the 'afterpage' package and issue '\afterpage{\clearpage}'. This
+will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all
+outstanding floats.
+
+ LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a 't' specifier in the
+PLACEMENT paramater. If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
+not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the
+next page, then you can prevent it by either using the 'flafter' package
+or using the command '\suppressfloats[t]', which causes floats for the
+top position on this page to moved to the next page.
+
+ Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with '\renewcommand{PARAMETER}{DECIMAL
+BETWEEN 0 AND 1}'):
+
+'\bottomfraction'
+ The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
+ at the bottom; default '.3'.
+
+'\floatpagefraction'
+ The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
+ floats; default '.5'.
+
+'\textfraction'
+ Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+ much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+ different page. The default is '.2'.
+
+'\topfraction'
+ Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+ floats; default '.7'.
+
+ Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
+'\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):
+
+'\floatsep'
+ Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt'.
+
+'\intextsep'
+ Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
+ default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for 10 point and 11 point
+ documents, and '14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for 12 point documents.
+
+'\textfloatsep'
+ Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+ default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+ Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
+'\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
+
+'bottomnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
+ page; default 1.
+
+'dbltopnumber'
+ Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+ two-column page; default 2.
+
+'topnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+ default 2.
+
+'totalnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+
+ The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats> contains
+suggestions for relaxing LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explaination of the
+float placement algorithm is Frank Mittelbach's article "How to infuence
+the position of float environments like figure and table in LaTeX?"
+<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>.
6 Sectioning
************
@@ -1009,15 +1456,31 @@ Synopsis:
A '\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the
number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered
-environment assigns that number to KEY.
+environment assigns that number to KEY. The assigned number can be
+retrieved with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).
+
+ Thus, in the example below the key 'sec:test' holds the number of the
+current section and the key 'fig:test' that of the figure.
+(Incidentally, labels must appear after captions in figures and tables.)
+
+ \section{section name}
+ \label{sec:test}
+ This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+ \begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+ \end{figure}
+ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
- A KEY name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+ A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished,
as usual.
- To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is
-common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
-colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
+ Although the name can be more or less anything, a common convention
+is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
+colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally creating two labels
+with the same name. Some commonly-used prefixes:
'ch'
for chapters
@@ -1030,8 +1493,7 @@ colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
'eq'
for equations
- Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:snark' or
-'fig.snark'.
+ Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:test' or 'fig.test'.
7.2 '\pageref{KEY}'
===================
@@ -1069,6 +1531,7 @@ environment begins and ends in the same manner:
==============
Synopsis:
+
\begin{abstract}
...
\end{abstract}
@@ -1081,83 +1544,118 @@ paragraphs.
Synopsis:
- \begin{array}{TEMPLATE}
- COL1 TEXT&COL1 TEXT&COLN}\\
+ \begin{array}{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
...
\end{array}
- Math arrays are produced with the 'array' environment, normally
-within an 'equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single
-mandatory TEMPLATE argument describing the number of columns and the
-alignment within them. Each column COL is specified by a single letter
-that tells how items in each row of that column should be formatted, as
-follows:
-
-'c'
- centered
-'l'
- flush left
-'r'
- flush right
+ or
- Column entries are separated by '&'. Column entries may include
-other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with '\\'.
-
- In the template, the construct '@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns in
-each row.
+ \begin{array}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
- Here's an example:
+ Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in
+math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
+environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Column entries are
+separated by an ampersand ('&'). Rows are terminated with
+double-backslashes ('\\') (*note \\::).
+
+ The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. See *note
+tabular:: for the complete description of COLS, and of the other common
+features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
+
+ There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'. The first
+is that 'array' entries are typeset in mathematics mode, in textstyle
+(except if the COLS definition specifies the column with '@p{..}', which
+causes the entry to be typeset in text mode). The second is that,
+instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's intercolumn space
+in an array is governed by '\arraycolsep' which gives half the width
+between columns. The default for this is '5pt'.
+
+ To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
+package. It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
+by parentheses '(..)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
+brackets '[..]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
+braces '{..}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
+bars '|..|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars '||..||', along with a number of other array constructs.
+
+ Here is an example of an array:
\begin{equation}
- \begin{array}{lrc}
- left1 & right1 & centered1 \\
- left2 & right2 & centered2 \\
+ \begin{array}{cr}
+ \sqrt{y} &12.3 \\
+ x^2 &3.4
\end{array}
\end{equation}
- The '\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space
-separating columns; the default is '5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other
-parameters which affect formatting in 'array' environments, namely
-'\arrayrulewidth' and '\arraystretch'.
-
- The 'array' environment can only be used in math mode.
-
8.3 'center'
============
Synopsis:
\begin{center}
- LINE1 \\
- LINE2 \\
+ .. text ..
+ \end{center}
+
+ Environment to create a sequence of lines that are centered within
+the left and right margins on the current page. If the text in the
+environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space. To force a line break at a particular spot use
+double-backslash '\\' (*note \\::).
+
+ This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
+environment.
+
+ In this example, depending on the line width, LaTeX may choose a
+break for the part before the double backslash, will center the line or
+two, then will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
\end{center}
- The 'center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
-of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the
-current page. Each line is terminated with the string '\\'.
+ A double backslash after the final line is optional.
8.3.1 '\centering'
------------------
-The '\centering' declaration corresponds to the 'center' environment.
-This declaration can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in
-a 'parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the
-page by putting a '\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or
-table environment.
+Declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
+most often used inside an environment such as 'figure', or in a
+'parbox'.
Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
-start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command (of an
-environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
- Here's an example:
+add vertical space above and below the text.
+
+ It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. If 'ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz' is surrounded
+by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose first line 'ww
+xx' is centered and whose second line, not centered, contains 'yy zz'.
+Usually what is desired is for the scope of the declaration to contain a
+blank line or the '\end' command of an environment such as 'figure' or
+'table' that ends the paragraph unit. Thus, if '{\centering xx \\
+yy\par} zz' is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
+with two centered lines 'xx' and 'yy', followed by a new paragraph with
+'zz' that is formatted as usual. See also the following example.
+
+ This example's '\centering' causes the graphic to be horizontally
+centered.
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+ \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion}
+ \end{figure}
- \begin{quote}
- \centering
- first line \\
- second line \\
- \end{quote}
+ The scope of the '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.
8.4 'description'
=================
@@ -1165,22 +1663,39 @@ environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
Synopsis:
\begin{description}
- \item [LABEL1] ITEM1
- \item [LABEL2] ITEM2
- ...
+ \item [FIRST LABEL] text of first item
+ \item [SECOND LABEL] text of second item
+ ...
\end{description}
- The 'description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
-LABEL is typeset in bold, flush right. The ITEM text may contain
-multiple paragraphs.
+ Environment to make a labelled list of items. Each item's LABEL is
+typeset in bold, flush-left. Each item's text may contain multiple
+paragraphs. Although the labels on the items are optional there is no
+sensible default, so all items should have labels.
+
+ The list consists of at least one item; see *note \item:: (having no
+items causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
+\item'). Each item is produced with an '\item' command.
- Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if
-you typeset a label in typewriter using '\texttt', you'll get bold
-typewriter: '\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too
-bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use '\tt', which
-resets all other style variations: '\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'.
+ Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a
+font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
+will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for
+typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bolded
+typewriter is to use declaritive style '\item[{\tt label text}]'.
+Similarly, get normal text use '\item[{\rm label text}]'.
- For details about list spacing, see *note itemize::.
+ For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
+and *note enumerate::. For information about customizing list layout,
+see *note list::; also, the package 'enumitem' is useful for this.
+
+ This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
+definitions.
+
+ \begin{definition}
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+ \end{definition}
8.5 'displaymath'
=================
@@ -1188,25 +1703,74 @@ resets all other style variations: '\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'.
Synopsis:
\begin{displaymath}
- MATH
+ .. math text ..
\end{displaymath}
-or
+ Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
+style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global
+option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
+
+ LaTeX will not break the math text across lines.
+
+ In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
+environment (*note equation::).
+
+ Note that the 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
+new documents. For example, there are a number of options in that
+package for having math text broken across lines.
+
+ The construct '\[..math text..\]' is essentially a synonym for
+'\begin{displaymath}..math text..\end{displaymath}' but the latter is
+easier to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a
+square bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will
+likely be unique. (The construct '$$..math text..$$' from Plain TeX is
+sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a
+synonym, because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the 'displaymath' environment has different
+vertical spacing, and because the 'displaymath' environment honors the
+'fleqn' option.)
+
+ The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+ \end{displaymath}
+ Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\(
+\int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.
- \[MATH\]
+8.6 'document'
+==============
- The 'displaymath' environment ('\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the
-MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global 'fleqn'
-option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::.
+The 'document' environment encloses the entire body of a document. It
+is required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
- No equation number is added to 'displaymath' text; to get an equation
-number, use the 'equation' environment (*note equation::).
+Synopsis:
-8.6 'document'
-==============
+ \AtBeginDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it when '\begin{document}' is executed, at the
+very end of the preamble. The code is executed after the font selection
+tables have been set up, so the normal font for the document is the
+current font. However, the code is executed as part of the preamble so
+you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+Synopsis:
-The 'document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is
-required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
+ \AtEndDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it near the end of the document. Specifically,
+it is executed when '\end{document}' is executed, before the final page
+is finished and before any leftover floating environments are processed.
+If you want some of the code to be executed after these two processes
+then include a '\clearpage' at the appropriate point in CODE.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
8.7 'enumerate'
===============
@@ -1214,243 +1778,237 @@ required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
Synopsis:
\begin{enumerate}
- \item ITEM1
- \item ITEM2
+ \item [FIRST LABEL] text of first item
+ \item [SECOND LABEL] text of second item
...
\end{enumerate}
- The 'enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as 'itemize'
-(*note itemize::) and 'description' (*note description::).
+ Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on whether this environment is nested within
+another; see below.
+
+ The list consists of at least one item. Having no items causes the
+LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'. Each item is
+produced with an '\item' command.
- Each item of an enumerated list begins with an '\item' command.
-There must be at least one '\item' command within the environment.
+ This example lists the top two finishers in the 1908 Olympic
+marathon.
- By default, the numbering at each level is done like this:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ Enumerations may be nested within a paragraph-making environment,
+including 'itemize' (*note itemize::), 'description' (*note
+description::) and 'enumeration', up to four levels deep. The format of
+the label produced depends on the place in the nesting. This gives
+LaTeX's default for the format at each nesting level (where 1 is the
+outermost level):
- 1. 1., 2., ...
- 2. (a), (b), ...
- 3. i., ii., ...
- 4. A., B., ...
+ 1. arabic number followed by a period: '1.', '2.', ...
+ 2. lower case letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
+ 3. lower case roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
+ 4. upper case letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...
The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
-'\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to
-'\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item.
+'\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If you use the optional argument
+to '\item' then the counter is not incremented for that item (*note
+\item::).
+
+ To change the format of the label use '\renewcommand' (*note
+\newcommand & \renewcommand::) on the commands '\labelenumi' through
+'\labelenumiv'. For instance, this first level list will be labelled
+with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item eI
+ \item bi:
+ \item si:
+ \end{enumerate}
- The 'enumerate' environment uses the commands '\labelenumi' through
-'\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
-'\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand &
-\renewcommand::). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
-letters:
+ For a list of counter-labelling commands like '\Alph' see *note \alph
+\Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.
- \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+ For more on customizing the layout see *note list::. Also, the
+package 'enumitem' is useful for this.
8.8 'eqnarray'
==============
-First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment has some infelicities which
-cannot be overcome; the article "Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
-describes them in detail
-(<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). The bottom line is
-that it is better to use the 'align' environment (and others) from the
-'amsmath' package.
+First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment is depreciated. It has
+infelicities that cannot be overcome, including spacing that is
+inconsistent with other mathematics elements (see the article "Avoid
+eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
+include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
+environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment.
- Nevertheless, here is a description of 'eqnarray':
+ Nevertheless, for completeness and for a reference when working with
+old documents, a synopsis:
- \begin{eqnarray} (or 'eqnarray*')
- FORMULA1 \\
- FORMULA2 \\
- ...
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
\end{eqnarray}
- The 'eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations
-or inequalities. It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment,
-with consecutive rows separated by '\\' and consecutive items within a
-row separated by an '&'.
+ or
+
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray*}
+
+ Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
- '\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning
-of not allowing a page break at that line.
+ It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand ('&'), and with rows separated by
+double backslash '\\'). The starred form of line break ('\\*') can
+also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there
+(*note \\::).
- An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
-'\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The '*'-form of the environment
-('\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering
-entirely, while otherwise being the same as 'eqnarray'.
+ The unstarred form 'eqnarray' places an equation number on every line
+(using the 'equation' counter), unless that line contains a '\nonumber'
+command. The starred form 'eqnarray*' omits equation numbering, while
+otherwise being the same.
The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
zero width.
+ This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an
+inequality, while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ \lefteqn{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n} \\
+ &\leq &y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &= &z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+ \end{eqnarray*}
+
8.9 'equation'
==============
Synopsis:
\begin{equation}
- MATH
+ math text
\end{equation}
- The 'equation' environment starts a 'displaymath' environment (*note
-displaymath::), e.g., centering the MATH text on the page, and also
-places an equation number in the right margin.
+ Make a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) with an
+equation number in the right margin.
+
+ The equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.
+
+ Note that the 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
+new documents.
8.10 'figure'
=============
- \begin{figure[*]}[PLACEMENT]
- FIGBODY
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT]
+ figure body
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
\label{LABEL}
- \caption[LOFTITLE]{TEXT}
\end{figure}
- Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-instead "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a page.
-Figures will not be split between two pages.
-
- When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a
-full-width figure (across both columns).
-
- The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
-put a float:
-
-'t'
- (Top)--at the top of a text page.
-
-'b'
- (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. However, 'b' is not
- allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
- output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
- package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
-
-'h'
- (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
- appears. However, 't' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
- automatically added.
-
- To absolutely force a figure to appear "here", you can
- '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
- For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.
-
-'p'
- (Page of floats)--on a separate float page, which is a page
- containing no text, only floats.
-
-'!'
- Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
- ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
- appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
- page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
- above.
+ or
- The standard 'report' and 'article' classes use the default placement
-'tbp'.
-
- The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc. you wish.
-
- The '\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The
-caption is numbered by default. If LOFTITLE is present, it is used in
-the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::).
-
- Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
-non-float text:
-
- The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
- at the bottom; default '.3'.
-
-'\floatpagefraction'
- The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
- floats; default '.5'.
-
-'\textfraction'
- Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
- much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
- different page. The default is '.2'.
-
-'\topfraction'
- Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
- floats; default '.7'.
-
- Parameters relating to vertical space around floats:
-
-'\floatsep'
- Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
- plus2pt minus2pt'.
-
-'\intextsep'
- Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
- default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt' styles, '14pt
- plus4pt minus4pt' for '12pt'.
-
-'\textfloatsep'
- Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
- default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
-
- Counters relating to the number of floats on a page:
-
-'bottomnumber'
- Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
- page; default 1.
-
-'dbltopnumber'
- Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
- two-column page; default 2.
-
-'topnumber'
- Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
- default 2.
-
-'totalnumber'
- Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+ \begin{figure*}[PLACEMENT]
+ figure body
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
+ \label{LABEL}
+ \end{figure*}
+
+ A class of floats (*note Floats::). Because they cannot be split
+across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
+instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
+following page.
+
+ For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
+placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
+
+ The starred form 'figure*' is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (*note \twocolumn::). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT 'b' in *note
+Floats::.
+
+ The figure body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
+it can contain text, commands, etc.
+
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (*note Cross
+references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
+for the figure. By default it is numbered. If LOFTITLE is present, it
+is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
+contents::).
+
+ This example makes a figure out of a graphic. It requires one of the
+packages 'graphics' or 'graphicx'. The graphic, with its caption, will
+be placed at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the end of the
+document, on a page of floats.
+
+ \begin{figure}[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
+ \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
+ \end{figure}
- The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats:
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats>.
-
-8.11 'filecontents': Create external files
-==========================================
+8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
+===========================================
Synopsis:
\begin{filecontents}{FILENAME}
- CONTENTS-OF-FILE
+ TEXT
\end{filecontents}
- ...
- \documentclass{MY-DOCUMENT-CLASS}
- The 'filecontents' environment is an "initial command", meaning that
-it can be used only before the '\documentclass' command, as in the
-synopsis above.
+ or
- LaTeX will create a file named FILENAME with the content
-CONTENTS-OF-FILE preceded by a header comment indicating how and when
-the file was generated. If the file already exists then nothing will
-happen.
+ \begin{filecontents*}{FILENAME}
+ TEXT
+ \end{filecontents*}
- You can also use the 'filecontents' package, which has the following
-advantages:
+ Create a file named FILENAME and fill it with TEXT. The unstarred
+version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the content of the
+created file with a header; see the example below. The starred version
+'filecontents*' does not include the header.
- * If the file already exists, then it will be overwritten.
+ This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
+often appears before the '\documentclass' command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+'bib' references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
- * You can use the 'filecontents' environment at any point after the
- declaration '\usepackage{filecontents}', not just before
- '\documentclass'.
+ The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and
+if so, does not do anything. There is a 'filecontents' package that
+redefines the 'filecontents' environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
- * The 'filecontents' package also provides a 'filecontents*'
- environment which is used in the same way as the 'filecontents'
- environment except that it won't insert any leading comment, so it
- is better suited to create files which aren't in LaTeX format.
+ For example, this document
- The 'filecontents' environment only creates the file, and is
-unrelated to using the created file. So you need to use, for instance,
-'\input' or '\usepackage' or '\bibliography' or whatever is applicable,
-to use the created file.
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+ \end{filecontents}
+ \usepackage{JH}
+ \begin{document}
+ Article by \myname.
+ \end{document}
- This environment is also useful to make a document in a
-self-contained file, for example, for a bug report, or to keep the
-content of a '.bib' file in the same file as the main document.
+ produces this file 'JH.sty'.
+
+ %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+ %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+ %% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+ %%
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
8.12 'flushleft'
================
@@ -1463,7 +2021,7 @@ content of a '.bib' file in the same file as the main document.
The 'flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
-right Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
+right. Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
8.12.1 '\raggedright'
---------------------
@@ -1489,7 +2047,7 @@ paragraph unit.
The 'flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
-left. Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
+left. Each line must be terminated with the control sequence '\\'.
8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
--------------------
@@ -1636,6 +2194,37 @@ empty, i.e., '{}', which leaves the default spacing.
The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by
'\linewidth' (*note Page layout parameters::).
+Synopsis:
+
+ \item text of item
+
+ or
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL] text of item
+
+ An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose
+default depends on the list type.
+
+ Because the optional argument OPTIONAL LABEL is surrounded by square
+brackets ('[' and ']'), to use square brackets inside the optional
+argument you must hide them inside curly braces, as in '\item[Close
+square bracket, {]}]'. Similarly, to use an open square bracket as
+first character in the text of the item, also hide it inside curly
+braces. *Note LaTeX command syntax::.
+
+ In this example the 'enumerate' list has two items that use the
+default label and one that uses the optional label.
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The first item is labelled '1.', the second item is labelled
+'sometimes', and the third item is labelled '2.' (note that, because of
+the optional label in the second item, the third item does not get a
+'3.').
+
8.17 'math'
===========
@@ -1646,7 +2235,7 @@ Synopsis:
\end{math}
The 'math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running
-text. '\(...\))' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
+text. '\(...\)' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
8.18 'minipage'
===============
@@ -1679,7 +2268,7 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
8.19 'picture'
==============
- \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)(XOFFSET,YOFFSET)
... PICTURE COMMANDS ...
\end{picture}
@@ -1696,24 +2285,24 @@ a length of 2.54 centimeters.
'\setlength' command, outside of a 'picture' environment. The default
value is '1pt'.
- A position is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
+ A "position" is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
the point with x-coordinate '2.4' and y-coordinate '-5'. Coordinates
are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a
position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
- The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
-'position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
-produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
-argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+ The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument which is a
+position (WIDTH,HEIGHT), which specifies the size of the picture. The
+environment produces a rectangular box with these WIDTH and HEIGHT.
- The 'picture' environment also has an optional 'position' argument,
-following the 'size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
-ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square
-brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
-the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin).
-For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
+ The 'picture' environment also has an optional position argument
+(XOFFSET,YOFFSET), following the size argument, that can change the
+origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
+(thereby determining the origin). For example, if '\unitlength' has
+been set to '1mm', the command
\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
@@ -1750,6 +2339,7 @@ corner of the box.
----------------
Synopsis:
+
\circle[*]{DIAMETER}
The '\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
@@ -1762,6 +2352,7 @@ solid circle.
-----------------
Synopsis:
+
\makebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
The '\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
@@ -1867,6 +2458,7 @@ and *note \thicklines::.
-------------------
Synopsis:
+
\multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}
The '\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern
@@ -1881,17 +2473,20 @@ Synopsis:
\oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
The '\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
-optional argument PORTION allows you to select part of the oval via the
-following:
+optional argument PORTION allows you to produce only half of the oval
+via the following:
't'
- selects the top portion;
+ selects the top half;
'b'
- selects the bottom portion;
+ selects the bottom half;
'r'
- selects the right portion;
+ selects the right half;
'l'
- selects the left portion.
+ selects the left half.
+
+ It is also possible to produce only one quarter of the oval by
+setting PORTION to 'tr', 'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.
The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with
@@ -1937,8 +2532,8 @@ Synopsis:
length and slope. The XSLOPE and YSLOPE values must lie between -4 and
+4, inclusive.
-8.20 'quotation'
-================
+8.20 'quotation' and 'quote'
+============================
Synopsis:
@@ -1946,28 +2541,34 @@ Synopsis:
TEXT
\end{quotation}
- The margins of the 'quotation' environment are indented on both the
-left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a
-blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
-
- Unlike the 'quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally.
-
-8.21 'quote'
-============
-
-Synopsis:
+ or
\begin{quote}
TEXT
\end{quote}
- The margins of the 'quote' environment are indented on both the left
-and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank
-line between text produces a new paragraph.
+ Include a quotation.
+
+ In both environments, margins are indented on both sides by
+'\leftmargin' and the text is justified at both. As with the main text,
+leaving a blank line produces a new paragraph.
- Unlike the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented.
+ To compare the two: in the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are
+indented by 1.5em and the space between paragraphs is small, '0pt plus
+1pt'. In the 'quote' environment, paragraphs are not indented and there
+is vertical space between paragraphs (it is the rubber length
+'\parsep'). Thus, the 'quotation' environment may be more suitable for
+documents where new paragraphs are marked by an indent rather than by a
+vertical separation. In addition, 'quote' may be more suitable for a
+short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
-8.22 'tabbing'
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \it Four score and seven years ago
+ .. shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+ \end{quotation}
+
+8.21 'tabbing'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -2011,7 +2612,7 @@ environment.
'\' (tabbing)'
Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
- i.e. everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
+ i.e., everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
'\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush against
the current column's tab stop.
@@ -2058,78 +2659,108 @@ environment.
end;\\
\end{tabbing}
-8.23 'table'
+8.22 'table'
============
Synopsis:
- \begin{table}[placement]
-
- body of the table
-
- \caption{table title}
- \end{table}
-
- Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables
-will not be split between two pages.
-
- The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
-a float; these are the same as that used with the 'figure' environment,
-and described there (*note figure::).
-
- The standard 'report' and 'article' classes use the default placement
-'[tbp]'.
-
- The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc., you wish. The '\caption' command allows you to title your table.
-
-8.24 'tabular'
+ \begin{table}[PLACEMENT]
+ table body
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
+ \label{LABEL}
+ \end{table}
+
+ A class of floats (*note Floats::). Because they cannot be split
+across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
+instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
+following page.
+
+ For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
+placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
+
+ The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
+it can contain text, commands, etc.
+
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (*note Cross
+references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
+for the table. By default it is numbered. If LOTTITLE is present, it
+is used in the list of tables instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
+contents::).
+
+ In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
+page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
+
+ \begin{table}[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{r|p{2in}} \hline
+ One &The loneliest number \\
+ Two &Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Cardinal virtues}
+ \label{tab:CardinalVirtues}
+ \end{table}
+
+8.23 'tabular'
==============
Synopsis:
- \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- ...
+ \begin{tabular}[POS]{COLS}
+ column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+ ...
\end{tabular}
or
- \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- ...
+ \begin{tabular*}{WIDTH}[POS]{COLS}
+ column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+ ...
\end{tabular*}
- These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
-items, aligned vertically in columns.
-
- '\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except
-for the last, where it is optional--unless an '\hline' command (to put a
-rule below the table) follows.
-
- The mandatory and optional arguments consist of:
+ These environments produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of
+horizontal rows. Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically
+in columns. This illustrates many of the features.
-'width'
- Specifies the width of the 'tabular*' environment. There must be
- rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the
- specified width.
-
-'pos'
- Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre
- of the environment.
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textit{Player name} &\textit{Career home runs} \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &714
+ \end{tabular}
- 't'
- align on top row
+ The vertical format of two left-aligned columns, with a vertical bar
+between them, is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'. Columns are
+separated with an ampersand '&'. A horizontal rule between two rows is
+created with '\hline'. The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash '\\'. This '\\' is optional after the last row unless an
+'\hline' command follows, to put a rule below the table.
- 'b'
- align on bottom row
+ The required and optional arguments to 'tabular' consist of:
-'cols'
- Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
- following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
- intercolumn material.
+WIDTH
+ Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'. Specifies the
+ width of the 'tabular*' environment. The space between columns
+ should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
+ table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+ are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+ ..' warning.
+
+POS
+ Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is
+ to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
+ the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: 't'
+ aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the
+ surrounding text, and 'b' aligns on the bottom row.
+
+ This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case
+ of a 'tabular' alone in a 'center' environment this option makes no
+ difference.
+
+COLS
+ Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+ sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+ column and intercolumn material.
'l'
A column of left-aligned items.
@@ -2143,110 +2774,254 @@ rule below the table) follows.
'|'
A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
- '@{TEXT}'
- This inserts TEXT in every row. An @-expression suppresses
- the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any
- desired space before the adjacent item must be included in
- TEXT.
-
- To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
- given column, you have to load the 'array' package and use the
- '>{...}' specifier.
-
- An '\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an
- extra space of width 'wd' to appear to the left of all
+ '@{TEXT OR SPACE}'
+ This inserts TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row. The
+ TEXT OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode. This text is
+ fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This specifier is optional: unless you put in your own
+ @-expression then LaTeX's book, article, and report classes
+ will put on either side of each column a space of length
+ '\tabcolsep', which by default is '6pt'. That is, by default
+ adjacent columns are separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is
+ misleadingly-named since it is not the separation between
+ tabular columns). Also by default a space of 6pt comes before
+ the first column as well as after the final column, unless you
+ put a '@{..}' or '|' there.
+
+ If you override the default and use an @-expression then you
+ must insert any desired space yourself, as in
+ '@{\hspace{1em}}'.
+
+ An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space, including
+ the space at the start or end, as in the example below where
+ the tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
+ ..
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ This example shows text, a decimal point, between the columns,
+ arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on that
+ decimal point.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
+ $3$ &$14$ \\
+ $9$ &$80665$
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ An '\extracolsep{WD}' command in an @-expression causes an
+ extra space of width WD to appear to the left of all
subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
'\extracolsep' command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space,
this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An
'\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression in
- the 'cols' argument.
+ the 'cols' argument. Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
+ intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\ \ldots\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+ Seven times down, eight times up
+ &such is life!
+ \end{tabular*}
+ \end{center}
+
+ To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
+ given column, load the 'array' package and use the '>{...}'
+ specifier.
'p{WD}'
- Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width
- WD, as if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{WD}' command.
- However, a '\\' may not appear in the item, except in the
- following situations:
-
- 1. inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or
- 'tabular'.
- 2. inside an explicit '\parbox'.
- 3. in the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or
- '\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must
- appear inside braces or an environment when used in a
- 'p'-column element.
+ Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD.
+
+ Note that a line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in
+ the item, except inside an environment like 'minipage',
+ 'array', or 'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in
+ the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft'
+ declaration (when used in a 'p'-column element these
+ declarations must appear inside braces, as with '{\centering
+ .. \\ ..}'). Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double
+ backslash as ending the row.
'*{NUM}{COLS}'
Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
- integer and COLS is any list of column-specifiers, which may
- contain another '*-expression'.
+ integer and COLS is a list of specifiers. Thus
+ '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to
+ '\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'. Note that COLS may contain
+ another '*-expression'.
Parameters that control formatting:
'\arrayrulewidth'
- Thickness of the rule created by '|', '\hline', and '\vline' in the
- 'tabular' and 'array' environments; the default is '.4pt'.
+ A length that is the thickness of the rule created by '|',
+ '\hline', and '\vline' in the 'tabular' and 'array' environments.
+ The default is '.4pt'. Change it as in
+ '\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}'.
'\arraystretch'
- Scaling of spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and 'array'
- environments; default is '1', for no scaling.
+ A factor by which the spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and
+ 'array' environments is multiplied. The default is '1', for no
+ scaling. Change it as '\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}'.
'\doublerulesep'
- Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by '||' in
- the 'tabular' and 'array' environments; default is '2pt'.
+ A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced
+ by the '||' specifier. The default is '2pt'.
'\tabcolsep'
- Half the width of the space between columns; default is '6pt'.
+ A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+ '6pt'. Change it with '\setlength'.
- The following commands can be used inside a 'tabular' environment:
+ The following commands can be used inside the body of a 'tabular'
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
-8.24.1 '\multicolumn'
+8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
---------------------
Synopsis:
- \multicolumn{COLS}{POS}{TEXT}
-
- The '\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several columns.
-The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of columns to
-span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the formatting of
-the entry; 'c' for centered, 'l' for flushleft, 'r' for flushright. The
-third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry.
-
- Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash;
-'\multicolumn' is used for the heading:
-
- \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
- \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
- 0x80&0x7FF \cr
- 0x800&0xFFFF \cr
- 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
+
+ \multicolumn{NUMCOLS}{COLS}{TEXT}
+
+ Make an 'array' or 'tabular' entry that spans several columns. The
+first argument NUMCOLS gives the number of columns to span. The second
+argument COLS specifies the formatting of the entry, with 'c' for
+centered, 'l' for flush left, or 'r' for flush right. The third
+argument TEXT gives the contents of that entry.
+
+ In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading 'Name'.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{lccl}
+ \textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ % row two
+ ..
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
+'array' or 'tabular' environment is broken into parts, where each part
+(except the first) begins with 'l', 'c', 'r', or 'p'. So from
+'\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}' the parts are '|r|', 'c', 'c',
+and 'p{1.5in}|'.
+
+ The COLS argument overrides the 'array' or 'tabular' environment's
+intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry. To affect
+that area, this argument can contain vertical bars '|' indicating the
+placement of vertical rules, and '@{..}' expressions. Thus if COLS is
+'|c|' then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
+will come in the intercolumn area before it and after it. This table
+details the exact behavior.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{|cc|c|c|}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{w} % entry one
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r|}{x} % entry two
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
+ &z % entry four
\end{tabular}
+ Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule
+because the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial
+vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical
+rule; although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the
+second COLS does have a starting one. Between entry two and entry three
+there is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
+surrounding 'multicolumn''s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
+rule. Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
+default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three '\multicolumn'
+leaves it out, and that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four
+there is a vertical rule because of the default.
+
+ The number of spanned columns NUMCOLS can be 1. Besides giving the
+ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the 'tabular' definition's default intercolumn area
+specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+
+ In the example below, in the 'tabular' definition the first column is
+specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry is
+centered with '\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}'. Also in the first
+row, the second and third columns are spanned by a single entry with
+'\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}', overriding the specification to
+center those two columns on the page range en-dash.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
+ &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
+ Classical &1730 &1820 \\
+ Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &1875 &1925
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ Note that although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a
+vertical rule between the first and second columns, because there is no
+vertical bar in the COLS of either of the first row's '\multicolumn'
+commands, no rule appears in the first row.
-8.24.2 '\cline'
+8.23.2 '\vline'
+---------------
+
+Draw a vertical line in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment extending the
+full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used in an
+@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
+This command is rarely used; typically a table's vertical lines are
+specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overriden as needed with
+'\multicolumn'.
+
+ This example illustrates some pitfalls. In the first line's second
+entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the cell. But
+that is different than putting it halfway between the two columns, so in
+that row between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the '{c|cc}' specifier coming before the one
+produced by the '\vline\hfill'. In contrast, the first line's third
+entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns. In
+the second line, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
+'\vline\hfill' the '\hfill' has no effect and the vertical line in that
+entry appears immediately next to the 'g', with no whitespace.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{c|cc}
+ x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\
+ abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi
+ \end{tabular}
+
+8.23.3 '\cline'
---------------
Synopsis:
\cline{I-J}
- The '\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns
-specified, beginning in column I and ending in column J, which are
-specified in the mandatory argument.
+ Draw a horizontal rule in an 'array' or 'tabular' environment
+beginning in column I and ending in column J. The dash '-' must appear
+in the mandatory argument. To span a single column use the number
+twice.
-8.24.3 '\hline'
----------------
+ This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
-The '\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing
-'tabular' or 'array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a
-line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
+ \begin{tabular}{llrr}
+ a &b &c &d \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-4}
+ e &f &g &h
+ \end{tabular}
-8.24.4 '\vline'
+8.23.4 '\hline'
---------------
-The '\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height
-and depth of its row. An '\hfill' command can be used to move the line
-to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression.
+Draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
+environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
+and between the rows of a table.
+
+ In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one
+above the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a
+single rule spanning both columns. Because of the '\hline', the
+'tabular' second row's line ending double backslash '\\' is required.
-8.25 'thebibliography'
+ \begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
+ Baseball &Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &Celtics \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+
+8.24 'thebibliography'
======================
Synopsis:
@@ -2271,10 +3046,11 @@ wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. It
is typically given as '9' for bibliographies with less than 10
references, '99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
-8.25.1 '\bibitem'
+8.24.1 '\bibitem'
-----------------
Synopsis:
+
\bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
The '\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the
@@ -2288,12 +3064,12 @@ CITE_KEY and label. When the '.aux' file is read by the
'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (see
next section) to produce the associated label.
-8.25.2 '\cite'
+8.24.2 '\cite'
--------------
Synopsis:
- \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS
+ \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS}
The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated
by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references
@@ -2302,15 +3078,15 @@ associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux' file.
The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation.
For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'.
-8.25.3 '\nocite'
+8.24.3 '\nocite'
----------------
-'\nocite{key_list}'
+'\nocite{KEYS}'
- The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes 'key_list', which
-is a list of one or more citation keys, on the '.aux' file.
+ The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes KEYS, which is a
+list of one or more citation keys, to the '.aux' file.
-8.25.4 Using BibTeX
+8.24.4 Using BibTeX
-------------------
If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
@@ -2347,7 +3123,7 @@ bibliography. The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named
Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite' will be listed in
the bibliography.
-8.26 'theorem'
+8.25 'theorem'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -2360,7 +3136,7 @@ Synopsis:
by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described
under '\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).
-8.27 'titlepage'
+8.26 'titlepage'
================
Synopsis:
@@ -2377,7 +3153,7 @@ be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The
You can use the '\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce
a standard title page without a 'titlepage' environment.
-8.28 'verbatim'
+8.27 'verbatim'
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -2394,7 +3170,7 @@ typewriter.
The 'verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt').
-8.28.1 '\verb'
+8.27.1 '\verb'
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -2411,7 +3187,7 @@ in LITERAL-TEXT.
The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible
space" character.
-8.29 'verse'
+8.28 'verse'
============
Synopsis:
@@ -2438,19 +3214,40 @@ your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a
printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these
lines must be broken into pages).
- LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some
-environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the '\\' command,
-and you can always manually force breaks.
+ LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
-9.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE]
-======================
+9.1 '\\'
+========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \\[MORESPACE]
+
+ or
-The '\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional
-argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to
-be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.
+ \\*[MORESPACE]
- The '\\*' command is the same as the ordinary '\\' command except
-that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+ Start a new line. The optional argument MORESPACE specifies extra
+vertical space to be insert before the next line. This can be a
+negative length. The text before the break is set at its normal length,
+that is, it is not stretched to fill out the line width.
+
+ Explicit line breaks in the text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
+particular, to start a new paragraph instead leave a blank line. This
+command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in a
+'tabular' or 'array' environment.
+
+ Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a 'p{..}' column in a
+'tabular' environment) the '\newline' command is a synonym for '\\'
+(*note \newline::).
+
+ In addition to starting a new line, the starred form '\\*' tells
+LaTeX not to start a new page between the two lines, by issuing a
+'\nobreak'.
+
+ \title{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe}
9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
============================
@@ -2464,9 +3261,23 @@ in the input will also be a new line in the output.
9.3 '\newline'
==============
-The '\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no
-stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph
-mode.
+In ordinary text this is equivalent to double-backslash (*note \\::); it
+breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
+
+ Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, in a column with a
+specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically 'p{..}', '\newline'
+will insert a line break inside of the column, that is, it does not
+break the entire row. To break the entire row use '\\' or its
+equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
+
+ This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
+of the table.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+ Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.
9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
===============================
@@ -2541,22 +3352,24 @@ sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.
10.1 '\cleardoublepage'
=======================
-The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all
-figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
-(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
+The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all the
+pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
+input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the
+next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if
+necessary.
10.2 '\clearpage'
=================
-The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures
-and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
+The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all the
+pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
+input to be printed.
10.3 '\newpage'
===============
The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
-(see '\clearpage' above).
+(*note \clearpage::).
10.4 '\enlargethispage'
=======================
@@ -2566,7 +3379,7 @@ The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
'\enlargethispage*{size}'
Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g. '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
+amount; e.g., '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
additional line.
The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page
@@ -2593,9 +3406,20 @@ to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
11 Footnotes
************
-Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with
-one command, the '\footnote' command. They can also be produced with
-two commands, the '\footnotemark' and the '\footnotetext' commands.
+Place a numbered footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+
+ Noe"l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+ to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+ love.\footnote{I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+
+ You can place multiple footnotes on a page. If the text becomes too
+long it will flow to the next page.
+
+ You can also produce footnotes by combining the '\footnotemark' and
+the '\footnotetext' commands, which is useful in special circumstances.
+
+ To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior.
11.1 '\footnote'
================
@@ -2604,57 +3428,187 @@ Synopsis:
\footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
- The '\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the
-bottom of the current page. The optional argument NUMBER changes the
-default footnote number.
-
- This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you
-cannot use it in sectioning commands like '\chapter', in figures, tables
-or in a 'tabular' environment. (See following sections.)
+ Place a numbered footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.
+
+ There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+ \textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{After
+ reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+
+ The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the footnote
+number. If you use this option then the footnote number counter is not
+incremented, and if you do not use it then the counter is incremented.
+
+ Change how LaTeX shows the footnote counter with something like
+'\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}', which uses a
+sequence of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol::). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'. By default LaTeX uses arabic numbers.
+
+ LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+'\footnote'; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as '\chapter' (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode). There are some workarounds; see following sections.
+
+ In a 'minipage' environment the '\footnote' command uses the
+'mpfootnote' counter instead of the 'footnote' counter, so they are
+numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. *Note minipage::.
11.2 '\footnotemark'
====================
-With no optional argument, the '\footnotemark' command puts the current
-footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner
-paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the
-'\footnotetext' command.
+Synopsis, one of:
- This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
-markers referring to the same footnote with
+ \footnotemark
+ \footnotemark[NUMBER]
- \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+ Put the current footnote number in the text. (See *note
+\footnotetext:: for giving the text of the footnote separately.) The
+version with the optional argument NUMBER uses that number to determine
+the mark printed. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode.
-after the first '\footnote' command.
+ This example gives the same institutional affiliation to both the
+first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version of 'footnote').
+
+ \title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
+ \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+
+ If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
+it does not. This produces several consecutive footnote markers
+referring to the same footnote.
+
+ The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
+ and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+ and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
11.3 '\footnotetext'
====================
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
+ \footnotetext{TEXT}
\footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
- The '\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as
-a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the '\footnotemark'
-command. The '\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph
-mode.
+ Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote. This command can
+come anywhere after the '\footnotemark' command. The optional argument
+NUMBER changes the displayed footnote number. The '\footnotetext'
+command must appear in outer paragraph mode.
- The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number.
+11.4 Footnotes in a table
+=========================
-11.4 Symbolic footnotes
-=======================
+Inside a 'table' environment the '\footnote' command does not work. For
+instance, if the code below appears on its own then the footnote simply
+disappears; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but nothing is
+set at the bottom of the page.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Ship} &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
+ \textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\
+ \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
-If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing
-numbers, redefine '\thefootnote' like this:
+ The solution is to surround the 'tabular' environment with a
+'minipage' environment, as here (*note minipage::).
- \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
+ .. tabular material ..
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+ The same technique will work inside a floating 'table' environment
+(*note table::). To get the footnote at the bottom of the page use the
+'tablefootnote' package, as illustrated in this example. If you put
+'\usepackage{tablefootnote}' in the preamble and use the code shown then
+the footnote appears at the bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+
+ \begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Date} &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
+ 1862 &Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &Army of Northern Virginia\footnote{Ending the war.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
+ \end{table}
+
+11.5 Footnotes in section headings
+==================================
+
+Putting a footnote in a section heading
+
+ \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
- The '\fnsymbol' command produces a predefined series of symbols
-(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). If you want to
-use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also
-redefine '\@fnsymbol'.
+ causes the footnote to appear both at the bottom of the page where
+the section starts and at the bottom of the table of contents page. To
+have it not appear on the table of contents use the package 'footmisc'
+with the 'stable' option.
+
+ \usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
+ ..
+ \begin{document}
+ ..
+ \section{Full sets\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+
+ Note that the '\protect' is gone; putting it in causes the footnote
+to reappear on the table of contents.
+
+11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
+===========================
-11.5 Footnote parameters
+Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+'bigfoot' extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
+including allow these two, as in this example.
+
+ \usepackage{bigfoot}
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
+ ..
+ \begin{document}
+ ..
+ The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+ second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+ ..
+
+11.7 Multiple references to footnotes
+=====================================
+
+You can refer to a single footnote more than once. This example uses
+the package 'cleverref'.
+
+ \usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % this version of package or later
+ \crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+ ..
+ \begin{document}
+ ..
+ The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
+ The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
+ But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+ ..
+
+ This solution will work with the package 'hyperref'. See *note
+\footnotemark:: for a simpler solution in the common case of multiple
+authors with the same affiliation.
+
+11.8 Footnote parameters
========================
'\footnoterule'
@@ -2681,187 +3635,460 @@ LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
'\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
respectively. Synopses:
- \newcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGVAL]{DEFN}
- \renewcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGVAL]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
-'*'
- The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments not
- contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX
- terms).
+ The '*'-form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX terms).
CMD
- The command name, beginning with '\'. For '\newcommand', it must
- not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'; for
- '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
+ Required; the command name. It must begin with '\'. For
+ '\newcommand', it must not be already defined and must not begin
+ with '\end'. For '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
NARGS
- An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments
- that the command will take. The default is for the command to have
- no arguments.
-
-OPTARGVAL
- If this optional parameter is present, it means that the first
- argument of command CMD is optional and its default value (i.e., if
- it is not specified in the call) is OPTARG. In otherwise, when
- calling the macro, if no '[VALUE]' is given after 'CMD'--which is
- different from having '[]' for an empty VALUE--then string
- 'OPTARGVAL' becomes the value of '#1' within DEFN when the macro is
- expanded.
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
+ arguments that the command will take. If this argument is not
+ present, the default is for the command to have no arguments. When
+ redefining a command, the new version can have a different number
+ of arguments than the old version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+ defined command \CMD is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT
+ (which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present
+ then \CMD does not take an optional argument.
+
+ That is, if \CMD is used with square brackets following, as in
+ '\CMD[MYVAL]', then within DEFN '#1' expands MYVAL. While if \CMD
+ is called without square brackets following, then within DEFN the
+ '#1' expands to the default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any
+ required arguments will be referred to starting with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
+ expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
+ the empty string.
DEFN
The text to be substituted for every occurrence of 'cmd'; a
construct of the form '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
Nth argument.
-12.2 '\newcounter'
-==================
+ A command with no arguments that is followed in the source by a space
+will swallow that space. The solution is to type '{}' after the command
+and before the space.
+
+ A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\JH}{Jim
+Hef{}feron}' causes the abbreviation '\JH' to be replaced by the longer
+text.
+
+ Redefining a command is basically the same:
+'\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}'.
+
+ Here's a command definition that uses arguments:
+
+ \newcommand{\defreference}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+
+Then, '\defreference{def:basis}' will expand to something like
+'Definition~3.14'.
+
+ An example with two arguments:
+'\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{#1\!\times\!#2}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
+
+ An example with optional arguments:
+
+ \newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
+
+Then, '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
+gives 'Dear John:'. And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.
+
+ The braces around DEFN do not delimit the scope of the result of
+expanding DEFN. So '\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}' is wrong since
+in the sentence
+
+ The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Virginia}.
+
+the words 'met the' will incorrectly be in italics. An extra pair of
+braces '\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}' fixes it.
+
+12.2 '\providecommand'
+======================
+
+Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+Synopses:
+
+ \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ If no command of this name already exists then this has the same
+effect as '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::). If a
+command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing.
+This is particularly useful in a style file, or other file that may be
+loaded more than once.
+
+12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
+========================================
Synopsis:
\newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER]
- The '\newcounter' command defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME.
-The new counter is initialized to zero.
+ The '\newcounter' command globally defines a new counter named
+COUNTERNAME. The name consists of letters only and does not begin with
+a backslash ('\'). The name must not already be used by another
+counter. The new counter is initialized to zero.
- Given the optional argument '[SUPER]', COUNTERNAME will be reset
-whenever the counter named SUPERCOUNTER is incremented.
+ If the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' appears, then COUNTERNAME
+will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the existing counter
+SUPERCOUNTER. For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within
+'section'. Any time SUPERCOUNTER is incremented with '\stepcounter'
+(*note \stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note \refstepcounter::)
+then COUNTERNAME is reset to zero.
*Note Counters::, for more information about counters.
-12.3 '\newlength'
-=================
+12.4 '\newlength': Allocating a length
+======================================
-Synopsis:
+Allocate a new "length" register. Synopsis:
\newlength{\ARG}
- The '\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a "length"
-command with a value of zero. The argument must be a control sequence,
-as in '\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if '\foo' is already defined.
+ This command takes one required argument, which must begin with a
+backslash ('\'). It creates a new length register named '\ARG', which
+is a place to hold (rubber) lengths such as '1in plus.2in minus.1in'
+(what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register). The register gets an initial
+value of zero. The control sequence '\ARG' must not already be defined.
- *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value,
-and for more information about lengths in general.
+ *Note Lengths::, for more about lengths.
-12.4 '\newsavebox'
-==================
+12.5 '\newsavebox': Allocating a box
+====================================
-Synopsis:
+Allocate a "bin" for holding a box. Synopsis:
- \newsavebox{CMD}
+ \newsavebox{\CMD}
- Defines '\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to
-refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
+ Defines '\CMD' to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. Such a box
+is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times (*note Boxes::)
+or to measure or manipulate. The name '\CMD' must start with a
+backslash ('\'), and must not be already defined.
-12.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
-============================================
+ The allocation of a box is global. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
-Synopses:
+12.6 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+============================================
- \newenvironment[*]{ENV}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
- \renewenvironment[*]{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
+'\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'. Synopses:
- These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
-'\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'.
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
-'*'
- The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments (not the
- contents of the environment) not contain multiple paragraphs of
- text.
+ Unlike '\newcommand' and '\renewcommand', the '*'-forms
+'\newenvironment*' and '\renewcommand*' have the same effect as the
+forms with no '*'.
ENV
- The name of the environment. For '\newenvironment', ENV must not
- be an existing environment, and the command '\ENV' must be
+ Required; the environment name. It does not begin with backslash
+ ('\'). It must not begin with the string 'end'. For
+ '\newenvironment', the name ENV must not be the name of an already
+ existing environment, and also the command '\ENV' must be
undefined. For '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an
existing environment.
NARGS
- An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the
- newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
-
-DEFAULT
- If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and DEFAULT
- gives the default value for that argument.
-
-BEGDEF
- The text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'; a construct
- of the form '#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the Nth
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
+ of that the environment will take. These arguments appear after
+ the '\begin', as in '\begin{ENV}{ARG1}...{ARGN}'. If this argument
+ is not present then the default is for the environment to have no
+ arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can
+ have a different number of arguments than the old version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+ the defined environment is optional, with default value
+ OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string). If this argument is
+ not present then the environment does not take an optional
argument.
-ENDDEF
- The text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'. It may not
- contain any argument parameters.
+ That is, when '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is present in the environment
+ definition, if '\begin{ENV}' is used with square brackets
+ following, as in '\begin{ENV}[MYVAL]', then within the environment
+ '#1' expands MYVAL. If '\begin{ENV}' is called without square
+ brackets following, then within the environment the '#1' expands to
+ the default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any required arguments
+ will be referred to starting with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
+ expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
+ the empty string.
+
+BEGDEFN
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'; a
+ construct of the form '#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the
+ Nth argument.
-12.6 '\newtheorem'
+ENDDEFN
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
+ Note that it may not contain any argument parameters, so '#N'
+ cannot be used here.
+
+ The environment ENV delimits the scope of the result of expanding
+BEGDEFN and ENDDEFN. Thus, in the first example below, the effect of
+the '\small' is limited to the quote and does not extend to material
+following the environment.
+
+ This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
+that it will be set in smaller type.
+
+ \newenvironment{smallquote}{%
+ \small\begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+ This shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
+that cites the author.
+
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \noindent\textit{#1}:
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+The author's name is optional, and defaults to Shakespeare. In the
+document, use the environment as here:
+
+ \begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
+ ..
+ \end{citequote}
+
+ The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use
+in ENDDEFN.
+
+ \newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor{#1}%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---\usebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+12.7 '\newtheorem'
==================
- \newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN]
- \newtheorem{NEWENV}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{LABEL}
+Define a new "theorem-like environment". Synopses:
+
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
+ \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
- This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments:
+ Both create a theorem-like environment NAME. Using the first form,
-NEWENV
- The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of
- an existing environment or otherwise defined.
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
-LABEL
+with the optional argument after the second required argument, creates
+an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
+NUMBERED_WITHIN: it will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is reset).
+
+ Using the second form,
+
+ \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
+
+with the optional argument between the two required arguments, will
+create an environment whose counter will share the previously defined
+counter NUMBERED_LIKE.
+
+ You can specify one of NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither,
+but not both.
+
+ This command creates a counter named NAME. In addition, unless the
+optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, the current '\ref' value will
+be that of '\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).
+
+ This declaration is global. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Arguments:
+
+NAME
+ The name of the environment. It must not begin with a backslash
+ ('\'). It must not be the name of an existing environment; indeed,
+ the command name '\NAME' must not already be defined as anything.
+
+TITLE
The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
number. For example, 'Theorem'.
+NUMBERED_WITHIN
+ Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
+ sectional unit such as 'chapter' or 'section'. When the
+ NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment's
+ counter will also be reset.
+
+ If this optional argument is not used then the command '\theNAME'
+ is set to '\arabic{NAME}'.
+
NUMBERED_LIKE
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like
- environment; the new environment will be numbered just like
+ Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
+ The new environment will be numbered in sequence with
NUMBERED_LIKE.
-WITHIN
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional
- unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as
- the WITHIN counter.
+ Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. This example has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in 'Definition 1' and 'Definition 2' in the output.
- At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both.
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
-12.7 '\newfont'
-===============
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ Because this example specifies the optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN
+to '\newtheorem' as 'section', the example, with the same document body,
+gives 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ In this example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new 'thm' environment to use the same
+counter as 'defn'. It gives 'Definition 1.1', followed by 'Theorem 2.1'
+and 'Definition 2.2'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{thm}
+ First thm
+ \end{thm}
+
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+12.8 '\newfont': Define a new font (obsolete)
+=============================================
+'\newfont', now obsolete, defines a command that will switch fonts.
Synopsis:
- \newfont{CMD}{FONTNAME}
+ \newfont{\CMD}{FONT DESCRIPTION}
- Defines a control sequence '\CMD', which must not already be defined,
-to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on the system
-is named 'FONTNAME.tfm'.
+ This defines a control sequence '\CMD' that will change the current
+font. LaTeX will look on your system for a file named 'FONTNAME.tfm'.
+The control sequence must must not already be defined. It must begin
+with a backslash ('\').
- This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font.
-More commonly, fonts are defined in families through '.fd' files.
+ This command is obsolete. It is a low-level command for setting up
+an individual font. Today fonts are almost always defined in families
+(which allows you to, for example, associate a boldface with a roman)
+through the so-called "New Font Selection Scheme", either by using '.fd'
+files or through the use of an engine that can access system fonts such
+as XeLaTeX (*note TeX engines::).
-12.8 '\protect'
-===============
+ But since it is part of LaTeX, here is an explanation: the FONT
+DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at clause"; this can
+have the form either 'at DIMEN' or 'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of
+'1000' means no scaling. For LaTeX's purposes, all this does is scale
+all the character and other font dimensions relative to the font's
+design size, which is a value defined in the '.tfm' file.
+
+ This example defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few
+characters in each:
-Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
-many more are so-called "fragile" commands. When a fragile command is
-used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be preceded
-by '\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments
-must have their own '\protect'.
+ \newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
+ \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 11pt}
+ \testfontat abc
+ \testfontscaled abc
- Some examples of moving arguments are '\caption' (*note figure::),
-'\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in 'tabular' and 'array'
+12.9 '\protect'
+===============
+
+All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust". Footnotes, line
+breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more, are
+fragile. A fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to
+certain commands. To prevent such commands from breaking they must be
+preceded by the command '\protect'.
+
+ For example, when LaTeX runs the '\section{SECTION NAME}' command it
+writes the SECTION NAME text to the '.aux' auxiliary file, moving it
+there for use elsewhere in the document such as in the table of
+contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without
+typesetting it directly is referred to as a "moving argument". A
+command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
+code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
+'\caption{..}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{..}' command
+(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the 'tabular' and 'array'
environments (*note tabular::).
- Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not be
-preceded by '\protect'.
+ If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with '\protect'. Every fragile commands must be protected
+with their own '\protect'.
+
+ Although usually a '\protect' command doesn't hurt, length commands
+are robust and should not be preceded by a '\protect' command. Nor can
+a '\protect' command be used in the argument to '\addtocounter' or
+'\setcounter' command.
- See also:
+ In this example the 'caption' command gives a mysterious error about
+an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each '\raisebox'
+command with '\protect'.
-<http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html>
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect>
+ \begin{figure}
+ ..
+ \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ In the next example the '\tableofcontents' command gives an error
+because the '\(..\)' in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
+'.toc' file. You can solve this by changing '\(..\)' to
+'\protect\(..\protect\)'.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents
+ ..
+ \section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
+ ..
13 Counters
***********
Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
-name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
-command that produces the number, except with no '\'. ('enumi'-'enumiv'
-are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the
-counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
+name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
+command associated with the number, except with no backslash ('\').
+Thus the '\chapter' command starts a chapter and the 'chapter' counter
+keeps track of the chapter number. Below is a list of the counters used
+in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
@@ -2869,11 +4096,20 @@ counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
subsubsection
+ The 'mpfootnote' counter is used by the '\footnote' command inside of
+a minipage (*note minipage::).
+
+ The 'enumi' through 'enumiv' counters are used in the 'enumerate'
+environment, for up to four nested levels (*note enumerate::).
+
+ New counters are created with '\newcounter'. *Note \newcounter::.
+
13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
=====================================================================
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
-instance, '\alph{enumi}'.
+instance, '\alph{enumi}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+with a backslash.
'\alph'
prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...
@@ -2899,7 +4135,7 @@ instance, '\alph{enumi}'.
asterisk(*) dagger(U+2021) ddagger(U+2021)
section-sign(U+00A7) paragraph-sign(U+00B6) parallel(U+2225)
- double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(U+2021U+2021) double-ddagger(U+2021U+2021)
+ double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(U+2020U+2020) double-ddagger(U+2021U+2021)
13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
===========================
@@ -2908,9 +4144,24 @@ Synopsis:
\usecounter{COUNTER}
- The '\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the
-'list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list
-items.
+ In the 'list' environment, when used in the second argument, this
+command sets up COUNTER to number the list items. It initializes
+COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called without its
+optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by '\refstepcounter',
+making its value be the current 'ref' value. This command is fragile
+(*note \protect::).
+
+ Put in the preamble, this makes a new list environment enumerated
+with TESTCOUNTER:
+
+ \newcounter{testcounter}
+ \newenvironment{test}{%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \usecounter{testcounter}
+ }
+ }{%
+ \end{list}
+ }
13.3 '\value{COUNTER}'
======================
@@ -2919,11 +4170,26 @@ Synopsis:
\value{COUNTER}
- The '\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used
-anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example:
+ This command expands to the value of COUNTER. It is often used in
+'\setcounter' or '\addtocounter', but '\value' can be used anywhere that
+LaTeX expects a number. It must not be preceded by '\protect' (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. *Note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.
+
+ This example outputs 'Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.'.
+
+ \newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
+ \newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
+ \addtocounter{test}{1}
+
+ Test counter is \arabic{test}.
+ Other counter is \arabic{other}.
- \setcounter{myctr}{3}
- \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+ This example inserts '\hspace{4\parindent}'.
+
+ \setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
13.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
@@ -2933,27 +4199,36 @@ Synopsis:
\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
- The '\setcounter' command sets the value of COUNTER to the VALUE
-argument.
+ The '\setcounter' command globally sets the value of COUNTER to the
+VALUE argument. Note that the counter name does not start with a
+backslash.
13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
====================================
-The '\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified
-by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.
+The '\addtocounter' command globally increments COUNTER by the amount
+specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.
13.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
===============================
The '\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as '\stepcounter'
-*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current '\ref' value to
-be the result of '\thecounter'.
+(*note \stepcounter::): it globally increments the value of COUNTER by
+one and resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)
+
+ In addition, this command also defines the current '\ref' value to be
+the result of '\thecounter'.
+
+ While the counter value is set globally, the '\ref' value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.
13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
============================
-The '\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary
-counters.
+The '\stepcounter' command globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all
+counters numbered within it. (For the definition of "counters numbered
+within", *note \newcounter::.)
13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
=============================================
@@ -2969,23 +4244,94 @@ current day (*note \today::).
14 Lengths
**********
-A 'length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+A "length" is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
as an argument.
-14.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
+ Lengths come in two types. A "rigid length" (what Plain TeX calls a
+"dimen") such as '10pt' cannot contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component. A
+"rubber length" (what Plain TeX calls a "skip") can contain those, as
+with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm'. These give the ability to stretch or
+shrink; the length in the prior sentence could appear in the output as
+long as 1.05 cm or as short as 0.99 cm, depending on what TeX's
+typesetting algorithm finds optimum.
+
+ The 'plus' or 'minus' component of a rubber length can contain a
+"fill" component, as in '1in plus2fill'. This gives the length infinite
+stretchability or shrinkability, so that the length in the prior
+sentence can be set by TeX to any distance greater than or equal to
+1 inch. TeX actually provides three infinite glue components 'fil',
+'fill', and 'filll', such that the later ones overcome the earlier ones,
+but only the middle value is ordinarily used. *Note \hfill::, *Note
+\vfill::.
+
+ Multiplying an entire rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid
+length, so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
+'\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}' then the value of '\zlength' is '3in'.
+
+14.1 Units of length
+====================
+
+TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math
+mode.
+
+'pt'
+ Point 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
+ places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.
+
+'pc'
+ Pica, 12 pt
+
+'in'
+ Inch, 72.27 pt
+
+'bp'
+ Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+ PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+
+'cm'
+ Centimeter
+
+'mm'
+ Millimeter
+
+'dd'
+ Didot point, 1.07 pt
+
+'cc'
+ Cicero, 12 dd
+
+'sp'
+ Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+
+ Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer
+of the font. The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the
+height of the lower case letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
+Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
+often used for horizontal lengths (there is also '\enspace', which is
+'0.5em'). Use of these can help make a definition work better across
+font changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between
+list items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}'
+is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
+definition given in points.
+
+ In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math
+unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. *Note Spacing in math mode::.
+
+14.2 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
==============================
The '\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can
be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches ('in'),
millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big points ('bp', etc.
-14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
-===============================
+14.3 '\addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}'
+=================================
The '\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the
amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.
-14.3 '\settodepth'
+14.4 '\settodepth'
==================
'\settodepth{\gnat}{text}'
@@ -2993,7 +4339,7 @@ amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.
The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal
to the depth of the 'text' argument.
-14.4 '\settoheight'
+14.5 '\settoheight'
===================
'\settoheight{\gnat}{text}'
@@ -3001,13 +4347,13 @@ to the depth of the 'text' argument.
The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal
to the height of the 'text' argument.
-14.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
+14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
==============================
The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
width of the TEXT argument.
-14.6 Predefined lengths
+14.7 Predefined lengths
=======================
'\width'
@@ -3037,9 +4383,9 @@ a sectioning command.
15.1 '\indent'
==============
-'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of
-the '\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used
-to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals to the
+'\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to
+add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
The default value for '\parindent' is '1em' in two-column mode,
otherwise '15pt' for '10pt' documents, '17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em'
@@ -3048,9 +4394,17 @@ for '12pt'.
15.2 '\noindent'
================
-When used at the beginning of the paragraph, '\noindent' suppresses any
-paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a
-paragraph.
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
+paragraph indentation, as in this example.
+
+ .. end of the prior paragraph.
+
+ \noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+
+ It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
+
+ To eliminate paragraph indentation in an entire document, put
+'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble.
15.3 '\parskip'
===============
@@ -3072,9 +4426,12 @@ where the '\marginpar' occurs.
When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be
placed
- * in the right margin for one-sided layout;
- * in the outside margin for two-sided layout;
- * in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+ * in the right margin for one-sided layout (option 'oneside', see
+ *note Document class options::);
+ * in the outside margin for two-sided layout (option 'twoside', see
+ *note Document class options::);
+ * in the nearest margin for two-column layout (option 'twocolumn',
+ see *note Document class options::).
The command '\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in
the opposite (inside) margin. '\normalmarginpar' places them in the
@@ -3138,653 +4495,889 @@ is used _outside_ of math mode.
The '\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the
formula to be that of 'displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below
-summations. For example
+summations. For example:
+
$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
==============================
-To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type
-'_{'exp'}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type '^{'exp'}'.
-LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the
-natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a
-subscript and a superscript.
+In math mode, use the caret character '^' to make the EXP appear as a
+superscript, ie. type '^{EXP}'. Similarly, in math mode,
+underscore '_{EXP}' makes a subscript out of EXP.
+
+ In this example the '0' and '1' appear as subscripts while the '2' is
+a superscript.
+
+ \( (x_0+x_1)^2 \)
+
+ To have more than one character in EXP use curly braces as in
+'e^{-2x}'.
+
+ LaTeX handles superscripts on superscripts, and all of that stuff, in
+the natural way, so expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{a_0}' will
+look right. It also does the right thing when something has both a
+subscript and a superscript. In this example the '0' appears at the
+bottom of the integral sign while the '10' appears at the top.
+
+ \int_0^{10} x^2 \,dx
+
+ You can put a superscript or subscript before a symbol with a
+construct such as '{}_t K^2' in math mode (the initial '{}' prevents the
+prefixed subscript from being attached to any prior symbols in the
+expression).
+
+ Outside of math mode, a construct like 'A
+test$_\textnormal{subscript}$' will produce a subscript typeset in text
+mode, not math mode. Note that there are packages specialized for
+writing Chemical formulas such as 'mhchem'.
16.2 Math symbols
=================
LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
-The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For
-example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
-symbol (\pi) in your output.
+For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
+symbol U+03C0.
+
+ Below is a list of commonly-available symbols. It is by no means an
+exhaustive list. Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
+its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
+parenthesis. The commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode.
'\|'
- \|
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
'\aleph'
- \aleph
+ U+2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
'\alpha'
- \alpha
+ U+03B1 Lower case Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
'\amalg'
- \amalg (binary operation)
+ U+2A3F Disjoint union (binary)
'\angle'
- \angle
+ U+2220 Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign '<' and
+ angle bracket '\langle'.
'\approx'
- \approx (relation)
+ U+2248 Almost equal to (relation).
'\ast'
- \ast (binary operation)
+ U+2217 Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
+ Synonym: '*', which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
+ Kleene star. Similar: '\star', which is five-pointed, and is
+ sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes
+ reserved for cross-correlation.
'\asymp'
- \asymp (relation)
+ U+224D Asymptomatically equivalent (relation).
'\backslash'
- \ (delimiter)
+ \ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
+ '\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.
'\beta'
- \beta
+ U+03B2 Lower case Greek letter beta (ordinary).
'\bigcap'
- \bigcap
+ U+22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+ binary intersection '\cap'.
'\bigcirc'
- \bigcirc (binary operation)
+ U+26AA Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+ composition '\circ'.
'\bigcup'
- \bigcup
+ U+22C3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+ union '\cup'.
'\bigodot'
- \bigodot
+ U+2A00 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
'\bigoplus'
- \bigoplus
+ U+2A01 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
'\bigotimes'
- \bigotimes
+ U+2A02 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
'\bigtriangledown'
- \bigtriangledown (binary operation)
+ U+25BD Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+ (operator).
'\bigtriangleup'
- \bigtriangleup (binary operation)
+ U+25B3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up
+ (operator).
'\bigsqcup'
- \bigsqcup
+ U+2A06 Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
'\biguplus'
- \biguplus
+ U+2A04 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+ (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
-'\bigcap'
- \bigvee
+'\bigvee'
+ U+22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
'\bigwedge'
- \bigwedge
+ U+22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
'\bot'
- \bot
+ U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a poset, or a
+ contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
'\bowtie'
- \bowtie (relation)
+ U+22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation).
'\Box'
- (square open box symbol)
+ U+25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary).
+ This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
'\bullet'
- \bullet (binary operation)
+ U+2022 Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.
'\cap'
- \cap (binary operation)
+ U+2229 Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcap'.
'\cdot'
- \cdot (binary operation)
+ U+22C5 Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
'\chi'
- \chi
+ U+03C7 Lower case Greek chi (ordinary).
'\circ'
- \circ (binary operation)
+ U+2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigcirc'.
'\clubsuit'
- \clubsuit
+ U+2663 Club card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\complement'
+ U+2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+ '$S^\complement$' (ordinary). This is not available in Plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. Also used:
+ '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$' or '$\bar{S}$'.
'\cong'
- \cong (relation)
+ U+2245 Congruent (relation).
'\coprod'
- \coprod
+ U+2210 Coproduct (operator).
'\cup'
- \cup (binary operation)
+ U+222A Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcup'.
'\dagger'
- \dagger (binary operation)
+ U+2020 Dagger relation (binary).
'\dashv'
- \dashv (relation)
+ U+22A3 Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+ turnstile '\vdash'.
'\ddagger'
- \dagger (binary operation)
+ U+2021 Double dagger relation (binary).
'\Delta'
- \Delta
+ U+0394 Greek upper case delta, used for increment (ordinary).
'\delta'
- \delta
+ U+03B4 Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
'\Diamond'
- bigger \diamond
+ U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). This is not available in
+ Plain TeX. In LaTeX you must load the 'amssymb' package.
'\diamond'
- \diamond (binary operation)
+ U+22C4 Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary). Similar:
+ large diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.
'\diamondsuit'
- \diamondsuit
+ U+2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary).
'\div'
- \div (binary operation)
+ U+00F7 Division sign (binary).
'\doteq'
- \doteq (relation)
+ U+2250 Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically
+ equal to '\Doteq'.
'\downarrow'
- \downarrow (delimiter)
+ U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: double line down
+ arrow '\Downarrow'.
'\Downarrow'
- \Downarrow (delimiter)
+ U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: single line
+ down arrow '\downarrow'.
'\ell'
- \ell
+ U+2113 Lower-case cursive letter l (ordinary).
'\emptyset'
- \emptyset
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). Similar: reversed empty
+ set '\varnothing'.
'\epsilon'
- \epsilon
+ U+03F5 Lower case Greek-text letter (ordinary). More widely used
+ in mathematics is the curly epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5. Related:
+ the set membership relation '\in' U+2208.
'\equiv'
- \equiv (relation)
+ U+2261 Equivalence (relation).
'\eta'
- \eta
+ U+03B7 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\exists'
- \exists
+ U+2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary).
'\flat'
- \flat
+ U+266D Musical flat (ordinary).
'\forall'
- \forall
+ U+2200 Universal quantifier (ordinary).
'\frown'
- \frown (relation)
+ U+2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary).
'\Gamma'
- \Gamma
+ U+0393 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\gamma'
- \gamma
+ U+03B3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\ge'
- \ge
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\geq'.
'\geq'
- \geq (relation)
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\ge'.
'\gets'
- \gets
+ U+2190 Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: '\leftarrow'.
'\gg'
- \gg (relation)
+ U+226B Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+ than '\ll'.
'\hbar'
- \hbar
+ U+210F Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
'\heartsuit'
- \heartsuit
+ U+2661 Heart card suit (ordinary).
'\hookleftarrow'
- \hookleftarrow
+ U+21A9 Hooked left arrow (relation).
'\hookrightarrow'
- \hookrightarrow
+ U+21AA Hooked right arrow (relation).
'\iff'
- \iff
+ U+27F7 If and only if (relation). It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with
+ a '\thickmuskip' on either side.
'\Im'
- \Im
+ U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
'\in'
- \in (relation)
+ U+2208 Set element (relation). See also: lower case Greek letter
+ epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and rounded small epsilon '\varepsilon'.
'\infty'
- \infty
+ U+221E Infinity (ordinary).
'\int'
- \int
+ U+222B Integral (operator).
'\iota'
- \iota
+ U+03B9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\Join'
- condensed bowtie symbol (relation)
+ U+2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+ TeX.
'\kappa'
- \kappa
+ U+03BA Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\Lambda'
- \Lambda
+ U+039B Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\lambda'
- \lambda
+ U+03BB Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\land'
- \land
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for '\wedge'. See
+ also logical or '\lor'.
'\langle'
- \langle (delimiter)
+ U+27E8 Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+ less-than '<'. Matches '\rangle'.
'\lbrace'
- \lbrace (delimiter)
+ U+007B Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: '\{'.
+ Matches '\rbrace'.
'\lbrack'
- \lbrack (delimiter)
+ U+005B Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: '['.
+ Matches '\rbrack'.
'\lceil'
- \lceil (delimiter)
+ U+2308 Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the
+ bottom shaved off (opening). Matches '\rceil'.
'\le'
- \le
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\leq'.
'\leadsto'
+ U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). This is not available in
+ Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. To get
+ this symbol outside of math mode you can put
+ '\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
+ then use '\Leadsto' instead.
'\Leftarrow'
- \Leftarrow
+ U+21D0 Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line left arrow '\leftarrow'.
'\leftarrow'
- \leftarrow
+ U+2190 Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: '\gets'.
+ Similar: double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.
'\leftharpoondown'
- \leftharpoondown
+ U+21BD Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
'\leftharpoonup'
- \leftharpoonup
+ U+21BC Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
'\Leftrightarrow'
- \Leftrightarrow
+ U+21D4 Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line double headed arrow '\leftrightarrow'.
'\leftrightarrow'
- \leftrightarrow
+ U+2194 Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ double-line double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.
'\leq'
- \leq (relation)
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\le'.
'\lfloor'
- \lfloor (delimiter)
+ U+230A Left floor bracket (opening).
'\lhd'
- (left-pointing arrow head)
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). This
+ is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
'\ll'
- \ll (relation)
+ U+226A Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+ than '\gg'.
'\lnot'
- \lnot
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\neg'.
'\longleftarrow'
- \longleftarrow
+ U+27F5 Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line left arrow '\Longleftarrow'.
'\longleftrightarrow'
- \longleftrightarrow
+ U+27F7 Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ long double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.
'\longmapsto'
- \longmapsto
+ U+27FC Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: shorter version '\mapsto'.
'\longrightarrow'
- \longrightarrow
+ U+27F6 Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line right arrow '\Longrightarrow'.
'\lor'
- \lor
+ U+2228 Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge '\wedge'.
'\mapsto'
- \mapsto
+ U+21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.
'\mho'
+ U+2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+ This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
'\mid'
- \mid (relation)
+ U+2223 Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+ '\mid' is for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.
+
+ Similar: '\vert' and '|' produce the same single-line vertical bar
+ symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class ordinary) and
+ you should not use them as relations but instead only as ordinals,
+ i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+ for '\vert' and for norm see the entry for '\Vert'.
'\models'
- \models (relation)
+ U+22A8 Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+ (relation). Similar: long double dash '\vDash'.
'\mp'
- \mp (binary operation)
+ U+2213 Minus or plus (relation).
'\mu'
- \mu
+ U+03BC Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\nabla'
- \nabla
+ U+2207 Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
'\natural'
- \natural
+ U+266E Musical natural notation (ordinary).
'\ne'
- \ne
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\neq'.
'\nearrow'
- \nearrow
+ U+2197 North-east arrow (relation).
'\neg'
- \neg
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\lnot'. Sometimes
+ instead used for negation: '\sim'.
'\neq'
- \neq (relation)
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\ne'.
'\ni'
- \ni (relation)
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\owns'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
'\not'
- Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=.
+ U+0020U+00A0U+0338 Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+ following operator (relation).
+
+ Many negated operators that don't require '\not' are available,
+ particularly with the 'amssymb' package. For example, '\notin' is
+ probably typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
'\notin'
- \ni
+ U+2209 Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+ of '\nsubseteq'.
'\nu'
- \nu
+ U+03BD Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\nwarrow'
- \nwarrow
+ U+2196 North-west arrow (relation).
'\odot'
- \odot (binary operation)
+ U+2299 Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigodot'.
'\oint'
- \oint
+ U+222E Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+ (operator).
'\Omega'
- \Omega
+ U+03A9 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\omega'
- \omega
+ U+03C9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\ominus'
- \ominus (binary operation)
+ U+2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
'\oplus'
- \oplus (binary operation)
+ U+2295 Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigoplus'.
'\oslash'
- \oslash (binary operation)
+ U+2298 Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
'\otimes'
- \otimes (binary operation)
+ U+2297 Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigotimes'.
'\owns'
- \owns
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\ni'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
'\parallel'
- \parallel (relation)
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\|'.
'\partial'
- \partial
+ U+2202 Partial differential (ordinary).
'\perp'
- \perp (relation)
+ U+27C2 Perpendicular (relation). Similar: '\bot' uses the same
+ glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ ordinary.
'\phi'
- \phi
+ U+03D5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varphi' U+03C6.
'\Pi'
- \Pi
+ U+03A0 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\pi'
- \pi
+ U+03C0 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varpi' U+03D6.
'\pm'
- \pm (binary operation)
+ U+00B1 Plus or minus (binary).
'\prec'
- \prec (relation)
+ U+227A Preceeds (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
'\preceq'
- \preceq (relation)
+ U+2AAF Preceeds or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equals '\leq'.
'\prime'
- \prime
+ U+2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
+ used as a superscript '$A^\prime$'. Note that '$f^\prime$' and
+ '$f'$' produce the same result. An advantage of the second is that
+ '$f'''$' produces the the desired symbol, that is, the same result
+ as '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses somewhat less typing. Note
+ that you can only use '\prime' in math mode but you can type right
+ single quote ''' in text mode also, although it resuts in a
+ different look than in math mode.
'\prod'
- \prod
+ U+220F Product (operator).
'\propto'
- \propto (relation)
+ U+221D Is proportional to (relation)
'\Psi'
- \Psi
+ U+03A8 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\psi'
- \psi
+ U+03C8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\rangle'
- \rangle (delimiter)
+ U+27B9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar:
+ greater than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
'\rbrace'
- \rbrace (delimiter)
+ U+007D Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: '\}'.
+ Matches '\lbrace'.
'\rbrack'
- \rbrack (delimiter)
+ U+005D Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ']'.
+ Matches '\lbrack'.
'\rceil'
- \rceil (delimiter)
+ U+2309 Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches '\lceil'.
'\Re'
- \Re
+ U+211C Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary).
+ Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access
+ this, load the 'amsfonts' package.
+
+'\restriction'
+ U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation).
+ Synonym: '\upharpoonright'. Not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
+ you should load the 'amssymb' package.
'\rfloor'
- \rfloor
+ U+230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+ off (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
'\rhd'
- (binary operation)
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). This
+ is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should
+ instead load 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a
+ relation and so gives better spacing).
'\rho'
- \rho
+ U+03C1 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varrho' U+03F1.
'\Rightarrow'
- \Rightarrow
+ U+21D2 Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation).
+ Similar: right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.
'\rightarrow'
- \rightarrow
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\to'. Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.
'\rightharpoondown'
- \rightharpoondown
+ U+21C1 Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
'\rightharpoonup'
- \rightharpoonup
+ U+21C0 Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
'\rightleftharpoons'
- \rightleftharpoons
+ U+21CC Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
'\searrow'
- \searrow
+ U+2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
'\setminus'
- \setminus (binary operation)
+ U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or slash, like \ (binary).
+ Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also '\textbackslash' outside
+ of math mode.
'\sharp'
- \sharp
+ U+266F Musical sharp (ordinary).
'\Sigma'
- \Sigma
+ U+03A3 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\sigma'
- \sigma
+ U+03C3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varsigma' U+03C2.
'\sim'
- \sim (relation)
+ U+223C Similar, in a relation (relation).
'\simeq'
- \simeq (relation)
+ U+2243 Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
'\smallint'
- \smallint
+ U+222B Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+ display (operator).
'\smile'
- \smile (relation)
+ U+2323 Upward curving arc (ordinary).
'\spadesuit'
- \spadesuit
+ U+2660 Spade card suit (ordinary).
'\sqcap'
- \sqcap (binary operation)
+ U+2293 Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+ intersection 'cap'.
'\sqcup'
- \sqcup (binary operation)
+ U+2294 Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union 'cup'.
+ Related: variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.
'\sqsubset'
- (relation)
+ U+228F Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
+ This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
'\sqsubseteq'
- \sqsubseteq (relation)
+ U+2291 Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+ equal to '\subseteq'.
'\sqsupset'
- (relation)
+ U+2290 Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+ superset '\supset'. This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
+ you should load the 'amssymb' package.
'\sqsupseteq'
- \sqsupseteq (relation)
+ U+2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset
+ or equal '\supseteq'.
'\star'
- \star (binary operation)
+ U+22C6 Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+ operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+ Similar: the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are
+ six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+ as with the Kleene star.
'\subset'
- \subset (relation)
+ U+2282 Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
'\subseteq'
- \subseteq (relation)
+ U+2286 Subset or equal to (relation).
'\succ'
- \succ (relation)
+ U+227B Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+ than '>'.
'\succeq'
- \succeq (relation)
+ U+2AB0 Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equal to '\leq'.
'\sum'
- \sum
+ U+2211 Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+ sigma '\Sigma'.
'\supset'
- \supset (relation)
+ U+2283 Superset (relation).
'\supseteq'
- \supseteq (relation)
+ U+2287 Superset or equal to (relation).
'\surd'
- \surd
+ U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{..}'
+ typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
+ to cover the argument.
'\swarrow'
- \swarrow
+ U+2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
'\tau'
- \tau
+ U+03C4 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\theta'
- \theta
+ U+03B8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\vartheta' U+03D1.
'\times'
- \times (binary operation)
+ U+00D7 Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+ also '\cdot'.
'\to'
- \to
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\rightarrow'.
'\top'
- \top
+ U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a poset (ordinary). See
+ also '\bot'.
'\triangle'
- \triangle
+ U+25B3 Triangle (ordinary).
'\triangleleft'
- \triangleleft (binary operation)
+ U+25C1 Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary).
+ Similar: '\lhd'. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
'\triangleright'
- \triangleright (binary operation)
+ U+25B7 Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
+ subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
+ use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
'\unlhd'
- left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+ U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with
+ a line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In
+ LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
'\unrhd'
- right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+ U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with
+ a line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In
+ LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
'\Uparrow'
- \Uparrow (delimiter)
+ U+21D1 Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line up-pointing arrow '\uparrow'.
'\uparrow'
- \uparrow (delimiter)
+ U+2191 Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation).
+ Similar: double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.
'\Updownarrow'
- \Updownarrow (delimiter)
+ U+21D5 Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\updownarrow'.
'\updownarrow'
- \updownarrow (delimiter)
+ U+2195 Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\Updownarrow'.
+
+'\upharpoonright'
+ U+21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
+ Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you
+ should load the 'amssymb' package.
'\uplus'
- \uplus (binary operation)
+ U+228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the
+ middle (binary). Similar: union '\cup'. Related: variable-sized
+ operator '\biguplus'.
'\Upsilon'
- \Upsilon
+ U+03A5 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\upsilon'
- \upsilon
+ U+03C5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\varepsilon'
- \varepsilon
+ U+03B5 Rounded small epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used
+ in mathematics than the non-variant lower case Greek-text letter
+ form '\epsilon' U+03F5. Related: set membership '\in'.
'\varphi'
- \varphi
+ U+03C6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.
'\varpi'
- \varpi
+ U+03D6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\pi' U+03C0.
'\varrho'
- \varrho
+ U+03F1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\rho' U+03C1.
'\varsigma'
- \varsigma
+ U+03C2 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\sigma' U+03C3.
'\vartheta'
- \vartheta
+ U+03D1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\theta' U+03B8.
'\vdash'
- \vdash (relation)
+ U+22A2 Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation).
+ Similar: turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.
'\vee'
- \vee (binary operation)
+ U+2228 Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
+ and '\wedge'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigvee'.
'\Vert'
- \Vert (delimiter)
+ U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+ bar '\vert'.
+
+ For a norm you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
+ '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}' to your preamble.
+ This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars
+ that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\norm*{M^\perp}$' then the height of
+ the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\norm{M^\perp}' the bars do not grow with the height of the
+ argument but instead are the default height, and '\norm[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{M^\perp}' also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+ the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
'\vert'
- \vert (delimiter)
+ U+007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+ vertical bar '\Vert'. For such that, as in the definition of a
+ set, use '\mid' because it is a relation.
+
+ For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
+ '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}' to your preamble.
+ This gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars
+ that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$' then the height
+ of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}' the bars do not grow with the height of
+ the argument but instead are the default height, and '\abs[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}' also gives bars that do not grow but are
+ set to the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
'\wedge'
- \wedge (binary operation)
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\land'. See also logical
+ or '\vee'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.
'\wp'
- \wp
+ U+2118 Weierstrass p (ordinary).
'\wr'
- \wr (binary operation)
+ U+2240 Wreath product (binary).
'\Xi'
- \Xi
+ U+039E Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\xi'
- \xi
+ U+03BE Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\zeta'
- \zeta
+ U+03B6 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
16.3 Math functions
===================
@@ -3814,10 +5407,10 @@ spacing.
\cosh
'\cot'
- \cos
+ \cot
'\coth'
- \cosh
+ \coth
'\csc'
\csc
@@ -3826,7 +5419,7 @@ spacing.
\deg
'\det'
- \deg
+ \det
'\dim'
\dim
@@ -3943,26 +5536,51 @@ Accents::).
'\widehat'
Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}.
-'\widehat'
+'\widetilde'
Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}.
16.5 Spacing in math mode
=========================
-In a 'math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in
-the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you
-want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following commands for use in
-math mode:
+In a 'math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces that you use in the
+source, and instead puts in the spacing according to the normal rules
+for mathematics texts.
+
+ Many math mode spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math
+unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family (*note Units of length::). LaTeX provides the
+following commands for use in math mode:
'\;'
- A thick space (5\over18\,quad).
+ Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. The longer name is '\thickspace'.
+ Math mode only.
+
'\:'
'\>'
- Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad).
+ Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. The longer name is
+ '\medspace'. Math mode only.
+
'\,'
- A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode.
+ Normally '3mu'. The longer name is '\thinspace'. This can be used
+ in both math mode and text mode.
+
'\!'
- A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad).
+ A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. Math mode only.
+
+'\quad'
+ This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
+ surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space
+ between two equations inside a 'displaymath' environment. It is
+ available in both text and math mode.
+
+'\qquad'
+ A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in both
+ text and math mode.
+
+ In this example a thinspace separates the function from the
+infinitesimal.
+
+ \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
16.6 Math miscellany
====================
@@ -4158,69 +5776,135 @@ STYLE for the current page only.
LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
- Another space-producing command is '\,' to produce a "thin" space
-(usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often
-useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::).
-
19.1 '\hspace'
==============
Synopsis:
- \hspace[*]{LENGTH}
+ \hspace{LENGTH}
+ \hspace*{LENGTH}
+
+ Add the horizontal space given by LENGTH. The LENGTH is a rubber
+length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, in any
+unit that LaTeX understands (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This command can add both positive and negative space; adding
+negative space is like backspacing.
+
+ Normally when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
+space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
+get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both.
+This command's starred version '\hspace*{..}' puts a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
+output.
- The '\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument can
-be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands: points, inches, etc.
-It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive space
-with an '\hspace' command; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+ This example make a one-line paragraph that puts 'Name:' an inch from
+the right margin.
- LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning
-or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional '*' form.
+ \noindent\makebox[\linewidth]{\hspace{\fill}Name:\hspace{1in}}
19.2 '\hfill'
=============
-The '\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no
-natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed.
+Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).
- The '\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the
-glue value '0pt plus1fill'); thus, '\hspace\fill' is equivalent to
-'\hfill'.
+ The command '\hfill' is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}'. For space
+that does not disappear at line breaks use '\hspace*{\fill}' instead
+(*note \hspace::).
-19.3 '\SPACE': Normal interword space
-=====================================
+19.3 '\(SPACE)' and \@
+======================
-The '\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful
-after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example, 'the
-article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental'. It is also often
-used after control sequences, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.'
+Mark a punctuation character, typically a period, as either ending a
+sentence or as ending an abbreviation.
+
+ By default, in justifying a line LaTeX adjusts the space after a
+sentence-ending period (or a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or
+colon) more than the space between words (*note \frenchspacing::).
+LaTeX assumes that the period ends a sentence unless it is preceded by a
+capital letter, in which case it takes that period for part of an
+abbreviation. Note that if a sentence-ending period is immediately
+followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or double
+quote, then the intersentence space follows that parenthesis or quote.
+
+ If you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not
+a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the
+sentence, then follow that period with a backslash-space ('\ ') or a tie
+('~'). Examples are 'Nat.\ Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean', and
+'(manure, etc.)\ for sale'.
+
+ For other use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) after CS::.
+
+ In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
+period that ends the sentence, then put '\@' on the left of that period.
+For example, 'book by the MAA\@.' will have intersentence spacing after
+the period.
+
+ In contrast, putting '\@' on the right of a period tells TeX that the
+period does not end the sentence. In the example 'reserved words (if,
+then, etc.\@) are different', TeX will put interword space after the
+closing parenthesis (note that '\@' is before the parenthesis).
+
+19.4 '\ ' after a control sequence
+==================================
- In normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to
-'\ '.
+The '\ ' command is often used after control sequences to keep them from
+gobbling the space that follows, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.' And,
+under normal circumstances '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to
+'\ '. For other use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) and \@::.
-19.4 '\@': Force sentence-ending punctuation
-============================================
+ Some people prefer to use '{}' for the same purpose, as in '\TeX{} is
+a nice system.' This has the advantage that you can always write it the
+same way, like '\TeX{}', whether it is followed by a space or by a
+punctuation mark. Please compare:
-The '\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a
-sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a
-capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without '\@':
+ \TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.
- ... in C\@. Pascal, though ...
- ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+ \TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
-produces
+ When you define user commands (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::)
+you can prevent the space gobbling after the command by using the
+package 'xspace' and inserting '\xspace' at the end of the definition
+For instance:
+ \documentclass{minimal}
+ \usepackage{xspace}
+ \newcommand*{\Loup}{Grand Cric\xspace}
+ \begin{document}
+ Que le \Loup me croque !
+ \end{document}
+
+ A quick hack to use '\xspace' for existing command is as follows:
+ \documentclass{minimal}
+ \usepackage{xspace}
+ \newcommand*{\SansXspaceTeX}{}
+ \let\SansXspaceTeX\TeX
+ \renewcommand{\TeX}{\SansXspaceTeX\xspace}
+ \begin{document}
+ \TeX is a nice system.
+ \end{document}
+
+19.5 '\frenchspacing'
+=====================
- ... in C. Pascal, though ...
- ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+This declaration (from Plain TeX) causes LaTeX to treat intersentence
+spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
-19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
+ In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions,
+including English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or
+after other punctuation marks) more than the space between words.
+Following this declaration, all spaces are instead treated equally.
+
+ Revert to the default behavior by declaring '\nonfrenchspacing'.
+
+19.6 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
===============================
'\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6
of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested quotes, as in
'".
-19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction
+19.7 '\/': Insert italic correction
===================================
The '\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space
@@ -4245,29 +5929,50 @@ after the 'f') with pdfTeX.
There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is
done in a different way.
-19.7 '\hrulefill'
-=================
+19.8 '\hrulefill \dotfill'
+==========================
-The '\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
-stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
-rule.
+Produce an infinite rubber length (*note Lengths::) filled with a
+horizontal rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of just white
+space.
-19.8 '\dotfill'
-===============
+ When placed between blank lines this example creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified, where the space in the middle is filled
+with evenly spaced dots.
-The '\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots
-instead of just white space.
+ \noindent Jack Aubrey\dotfill Melbury Lodge
+
+ To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use '\null' at the
+start or end.
+
+ To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+with '\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height
+1pt\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to
+1pt. Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
+'\renewcommand{\dotfill}{\leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@ 1.00em{\hss .\hss
+}\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
19.9 '\addvspace'
=================
-'\addvspace{length}'
+'\addvspace{LENGTH}'
+
+ Add a vertical space of height LENGTH, which is a rubber length
+(*note Lengths::). However, if vertical space has already been added to
+the same point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command then
+this command will not add more space than what is needed to make the
+natural length of the total vertical space equal to LENGTH.
+
+ Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
+environment that starts a new paragraph. (For instance, a Theorem
+environment is defined to begin and end in '\addvspace{..}' so that two
+consecutive Theorem's are separated by one vertical space, not two.)
+
+ This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
- The '\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height
-length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
-point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command, then this
-command will not add more space than is needed to make the natural
-length of the total vertical space equal to 'length'.
+ The error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' means that you
+were not in vertical mode when you invoked this command; one way to
+change that is to precede this command with a '\par' command.
19.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
====================================
@@ -4293,23 +5998,53 @@ document class.
19.11 '\vfill'
==============
-The '\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can
-stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to
-'\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::).
+End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length (*note
+Lengths::) that is infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as
+needed.
-19.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}'
-==========================
+ It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
+'\vfill' ends the current paragraph, whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
+infinite vertical space below its line irrespective of the paragraph
+structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
+to circumvent this see *note \vspace::.
-Synopsis:
+ In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
+contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the third 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
+halfway between them.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ Lost Dog!
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog!
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog!
+ \end{document}
- \vspace[*]{LENGTH}
+19.12 '\vspace{LENGTH}'
+=======================
- The '\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber
-length. LENGTH can be negative or positive.
+Synopsis, one of these two:
- Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by '\vspace' at the
-top or bottom of a page. With the optional '*' argument, the space is
-not removed.
+ \vspace{LENGTH}
+ \vspace*{LENGTH}
+
+ Add the vertical space LENGTH. This can be negative or positive, and
+is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+
+ LaTeX removes the vertical space from '\vfill' at a page break, that
+is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version '\vspace*{..}'
+causes the space to stay.
+
+ In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ 1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+
+ 2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+ \end{document}
20 Boxes
********
@@ -4364,9 +6099,9 @@ Synopsis:
\makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
The '\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
-TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional WIDTH
-argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the
-optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
+TEXT specified. The width of the box can be overridden by the optional
+WIDTH argument. The position of the text within the box is determined
+by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
'c'
Centered (default).
@@ -4378,8 +6113,8 @@ optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain
stretchable space for this to work.
- '\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox
-(picture)::.
+ '\makebox' is also used within the 'picture' environment *note
+\makebox (picture)::.
20.5 '\parbox'
==============
@@ -4621,7 +6356,7 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package.
Em-dash: -- (for punctuation).
'\textendash (or '--')'
- En-dash: -- (for ranges).
+ En-dash: - (for ranges).
'\texteuro'
The Euro symbol: Euro.
@@ -4728,7 +6463,8 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~.
'\b'
- Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_.
+ Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. See also
+ '\underbar' hereinafter.
'\c'
'\capitalcedilla'
@@ -4773,7 +6509,8 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is
always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
- descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::.
+ descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::. See
+ also '\b' above.
'\v'
'\capitalcaron'
@@ -4903,8 +6640,8 @@ comma-separated. Each FILE must exactly match a filename specified in a
This command can only appear in the preamble.
-22.3 \input
-===========
+22.3 '\input'
+=============
Synopsis:
@@ -4942,8 +6679,8 @@ contents.
The command '\nofiles' overrides these commands, and _prevents_ any
of these lists from being generated.
-23.1.1 \addcontentsline
------------------------
+23.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
+-------------------------
The '\addcontentsline'{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT} command adds an entry to the
specified list or table where:
@@ -4971,8 +6708,8 @@ ENTRY
What is written to the '.EXT' file is the command
'\contentsline{UNIT}{NAME}'.
-23.1.2 \addtocontents
----------------------
+23.1.2 '\addtocontents'
+-----------------------
The '\addtocontents'{EXT}{TEXT} command adds text (or formatting
commands) directly to the '.EXT' file that generates the table of
@@ -5044,61 +6781,122 @@ FAQ entry on this topic,
24 Letters
**********
-You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
-'letter' document class is designed to make a number of letters at once,
-although you can make just one if you so desire.
+Synopsis:
- Your '.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the other
-document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
-minimum:
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{SENDER ADDRESS}
+ \signature{SENDER NAME}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}
+ \opening{SALUTATION}
+ LETTER BODY
+ \closing{CLOSING TEXT}
+ \end{letter}
+ ... more letters ...
+ \end{document}
- \documentclass{letter}
- \begin{document}
- ... letters ...
- \end{document}
+ Produce one or more letters.
- Each letter is a 'letter' environment, whose argument is the name and
-address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
+ Each letter is in a separate 'letter' environment, whose argument
+RECIPIENT ADDRESS often contains multiple lines separated with a double
+backslash ('\\'). For example, you might have:
- \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
- \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith \\
+ 2345 Princess St. \\
+ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
...
\end{letter}
- The letter itself begins with the '\opening' command. The text of
-the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
-make no sense in a letter, like '\chapter', do not work. The letter
-closes with a '\closing' command.
-
- After the 'closing', you can have additional material. The '\cc'
-command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar '\encl'
-command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use '\\' to
-separate the items.
+ The start of the 'letter' environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+
+ The SENDER ADDRESS and SENDER NAME are common to all of the letters,
+whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the preamble. As
+with the recipient address, often SENDER ADDRESS contains multiple lines
+separated by a double backslash ('\\'). LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
+
+ Each letter environment begins with a required '\opening' command
+such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'. The LETTER BODY text is
+ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from from enumerated lists
+to displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
+sense in a letter are turned off. Each letter environment typically
+ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.
+
+ Additional material may come after the '\closing'. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like '\cc{the Boss \\
+the Boss's Boss}'. There's a similar '\encl' command for a list of
+enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with '\ps'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is to indent the signature and the '\closing' above
+it by a length of '\longindentation'. By default this is
+'0.5\textwidth'. To make them flush left, put
+'\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your preamble.
+
+ To set a fixed date use something like
+'\renewcommand{\today}{2015-Oct-12}'. If put in your preamble then it
+will apply to all the letters.
+
+ This example shows only one 'letter' environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{Sender's street \\ Sender's town}
+ \signature{Sender's name \\ Sender's title}
+ % optional: \location{Mailbox 13}
+ % optional: \telephone{(102) 555-0101}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address}
+ \opening{Sir:}
+ % optional: \thispagestyle{firstpage}
+ I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+ \closing{Your most humble, etc.,}
+ \end{letter}
+ \end{document}
These commands are used with the 'letter' class.
-24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS}
-=============================
+24.1 '\address'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
-The '\address' specifies the return address of a letter, as it should
-appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address
-should be separated by '\\' commands.
+ \address{SENDERS ADDRESS}
- If you do not make an '\address' declaration, then the letter will be
-formatted for copying onto your organization's standard letterhead.
-(*Note Overview::, for details on your local implementation). If you
-give an '\address' declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a
-personal letter.
+ Specifies the return address as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in SENDERS ADDRESS with a double
+backslash '\\'.
+
+ Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often
+put in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual 'letter' environment.
+
+ This command is optional: without the '\address' declaration the
+letter is formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto
+pre-printed letterhead paper. (*Note Overview::, for details on your
+local implementation.) With the '\address' declaration, it is formatted
+as a personal letter.
+
+ Here is an example.
+
+ \address{Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy}
24.2 '\cc'
==========
Synopsis:
- \cc{NAME1\\NAME2}
+ \cc{FIRST NAME \\
+ .. }
+
+ Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
+This command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+'\closing'. Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.
- Produce a list of NAMEs the letter was copied to. Each name is
-printed on a separate line.
+ \cc{President \\
+ Vice President}
24.3 '\closing'
===============
@@ -5107,87 +6905,133 @@ Synopsis:
\closing{text}
- A letter closes with a '\closing' command, for example,
- \closing{Best Regards,}
+ Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature,
+there is a '\closing' (although this command is optional). For example,
+
+ \closing{Regards,}
24.4 '\encl'
============
Synopsis:
- \encl{LINE1\\LINE2}
+ \encl{FIRST ENCLOSED OBJECT \\
+ .. }
+
+ Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.
- Declare a list of one more enclosures.
+ \encl{License \\
+ Passport }
24.5 '\location'
================
-'\location{address}'
+Synopsis:
- This modifies your organization's standard address. This only
-appears if the 'firstpage' pagestyle is selected.
+ \location{TEXT}
+
+ The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the each page. It only
+appears if the page style is 'firstpage'.
24.6 '\makelabels'
==================
-'\makelabels{number}'
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makelabels
+
+ Create a sheet of address labels from the recipient addresses, one
+for each letter. This sheet will be output before the letters, with the
+idea that you can copy it to a sheet of peel-off labels. This command
+goes in the preamble.
- If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet
-of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
+ Customize the labels by redefining the commands '\startlabels',
+'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' in the preamble. The command
+'\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns, etc., of the
+page onto which the labels are printed. The command '\mlabel{SENDER
+ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or one, if you
+choose to ignore the SENDER ADDRESS). The SENDER ADDRESS is the value
+returned by the macro '\returnaddress' while RECIPIENT ADDRESS is the
+value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment. By default
+'\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the SENDER ADDRESS.
24.7 '\name'
============
-'\name{June Davenport}'
+Synopsis:
- Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return
-address.
+ \name{NAME}
-24.8 '\opening{TEXT}'
-=====================
+ Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
+return address.
+
+24.8 '\opening'
+===============
Synopsis:
\opening{TEXT}
- A letter begins with the '\opening' command. The mandatory argument,
-TEXT, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For instance:
+ This command is required. It starts a letter, following the
+'\begin{letter}{..}'. The mandatory argument TEXT is the text that
+starts your letter. For instance:
- \opening{Dear Joe,}
+ \opening{Dear John:}
24.9 '\ps'
==========
-Use the '\ps' command to start a postscript in a letter, after
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ps{TEXT}
+
+ Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
'\closing'.
-24.10 '\signature{TEXT}'
-========================
+ \ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
-Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
-space for your signature. '\\' starts a new line within TEXT as usual.
+24.10 '\signature'
+==================
-24.11 '\startbreaks'
-====================
+Synopsis:
-'\startbreaks'
+ \signature{FIRST LINE \\
+ .. }
- Used after a '\stopbreaks' command to allow page breaks again.
+ The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
+is usual.
-24.12 '\stopbreaks'
-===================
+ The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing
+and after a vertical space for the traditional hand-written signature.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'. For example:
+
+ \signature{J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House}
-'\stopbreaks'
+ LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the '\closing' text down
+to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times 0.7em.
- Inhibit page breaks until a '\startbreaks' command occurs.
+ This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters
+in the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+'letter' environment and before the '\closing'.
-24.13 '\telephone'
+ You can include a graphic in the signature, for instance with
+'\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\ My
+name}' (this requires writing '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble).
+
+24.11 '\telephone'
==================
-'\telephone{number}'
+Synopsis:
+
+ \telephone{NUMBER}
- This is your telephone number. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
-pagestyle is selected.
+ The sender's telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
+where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.
25 Terminal input/output
************************
@@ -5384,1606 +7228,1783 @@ Concept Index
* Menu:
-* '*' prompt: Command line. (line 5243)
-* *-form of defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 2690)
-* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 2769)
-* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 974)
-* '.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 4997)
-* '.idx' file: Indexes. (line 5013)
-* '.ind' file: Indexes. (line 5027)
-* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: Indexes. (line 5020)
-* abstracts: abstract. (line 1072)
-* accents: Accents. (line 4694)
-* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 3903)
+* '*' prompt: Command line. (line 7136)
+* '*'-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 1422)
+* '.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 6780)
+* '.idx' file: Indexes. (line 6796)
+* '.ind' file: Indexes. (line 6810)
+* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: Indexes. (line 6803)
+* abstracts: abstract. (line 1535)
+* accents: Accents. (line 6475)
+* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 5541)
* accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters.
- (line 4505)
-* acute accent: Accents. (line 4708)
-* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 3908)
+ (line 6286)
+* acute accent: Accents. (line 6489)
+* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 5546)
* additional packages, loading: Document class options.
- (line 559)
+ (line 633)
* ae ligature: Non-English characters.
- (line 4797)
-* align environment, from 'amsmath': eqnarray. (line 1253)
-* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 1253)
-* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 1974)
-* amsmath package, replacing 'eqnarray': eqnarray. (line 1253)
-* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 980)
+ (line 6580)
+* align environment, from 'amsmath': eqnarray. (line 1848)
+* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 1848)
+* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 2585)
+* amsmath package, replacing 'eqnarray': eqnarray. (line 1848)
+* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 1428)
* aring: Non-English characters.
- (line 4793)
-* arrays, math: array. (line 1083)
-* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 4642)
-* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 4674)
-* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 4610)
-* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 4575)
-* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 4578)
-* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 4581)
-* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 4074)
-* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 370)
-* 'babel' package: Accents. (line 4694)
-* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 4584)
-* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 4590)
-* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 4587)
-* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 4717)
-* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 3911)
-* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 4734)
-* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 290)
-* 'beamer' template and class: beamer template. (line 5259)
+ (line 6576)
+* arrays, math: array. (line 1547)
+* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 6423)
+* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 6455)
+* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 6391)
+* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 6356)
+* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 6359)
+* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 6362)
+* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 4033)
+* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 5737)
+* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 374)
+* 'babel' package: Accents. (line 6475)
+* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 6365)
+* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 6371)
+* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 6368)
+* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 6498)
+* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 5549)
+* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 6515)
+* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 293)
+* 'beamer' template and class: beamer template. (line 7152)
+* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 1757)
* bibliography format, open: Document class options.
- (line 526)
-* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 2317)
-* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 2253)
-* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 2317)
-* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 4593)
+ (line 600)
+* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 3105)
+* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 3040)
+* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 3105)
+* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 6374)
+* Big point: Units of length. (line 4304)
* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
- (line 512)
-* bold font: Font styles. (line 678)
-* bold math: Font styles. (line 658)
-* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 1178)
-* boxes: Boxes. (line 4320)
-* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 4596)
-* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 4599)
-* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 2437)
-* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 2538)
-* breve accent: Accents. (line 4773)
-* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 3914)
+ (line 586)
+* bold font: Font styles. (line 719)
+* bold math: Font styles. (line 778)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 1688)
+* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 3785)
+* boxes: Boxes. (line 6101)
+* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 6377)
+* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 6380)
+* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 3225)
+* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 3361)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 6555)
+* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 5552)
* bug reporting: About this document.
- (line 247)
-* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 3240)
-* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 4602)
-* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 1511)
-* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 681)
-* cap height: Text symbols. (line 4610)
-* caron accent: Accents. (line 4783)
-* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 5099)
-* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 4738)
-* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 4581)
+ (line 250)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 4658)
+* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 6383)
+* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 2078)
+* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 722)
+* cap height: Text symbols. (line 6391)
+* caron accent: Accents. (line 6566)
+* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6940)
+* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 6520)
+* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 6362)
* centered equations: Document class options.
- (line 516)
-* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 4649)
-* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 1143)
-* centering text, environment for: center. (line 1129)
-* characters, accented: Accents. (line 4694)
+ (line 590)
+* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 6430)
+* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 1639)
+* centering text, environment for: center. (line 1605)
+* Centimeter: Units of length. (line 4308)
+* characters, accented: Accents. (line 6475)
* characters, non-English: Non-English characters.
- (line 4788)
+ (line 6571)
* characters, reserved: Reserved characters.
- (line 4486)
-* check accent: Accents. (line 4783)
-* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 3917)
-* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 4593)
-* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 4605)
-* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 4721)
-* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 3929)
-* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 4575)
+ (line 6267)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 6566)
+* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 5555)
+* Cicero: Units of length. (line 4317)
+* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 6374)
+* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 6386)
+* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 6502)
+* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 5567)
+* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 6356)
* class options: Document class options.
- (line 490)
-* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 459)
-* closing letters: \closing. (line 5109)
-* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 4566)
-* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 2384)
-* command line: Command line. (line 5231)
+ (line 544)
+* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 510)
+* closing letters: \closing. (line 6955)
+* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 6347)
+* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 3172)
+* command line: Command line. (line 7124)
* command syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 435)
+ (line 444)
* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 2683)
-* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 4610)
-* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 2384)
-* contents file: Output files. (line 380)
-* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 4523)
-* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 2862)
-* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 2721)
-* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 2921)
-* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 2935)
-* creating letters: Letters. (line 5050)
-* creating pictures: picture. (line 1683)
-* creating tables: table. (line 2065)
-* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 4084)
-* cross references: Cross references. (line 1001)
-* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 370)
-* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 1040)
-* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 1050)
-* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 4621)
-* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 4630)
-* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 4618)
-* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 4526)
-* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 4615)
-* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 4080)
-* 'datetime' package: \today. (line 4862)
+ (line 3649)
+* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 3734)
+* commands, redefining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 3649)
+* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 6391)
+* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 3172)
+* contents file: Output files. (line 384)
+* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 6304)
+* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 4100)
+* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 3749)
+* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 4184)
+* counters, printing: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 4124)
+* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 4213)
+* creating pictures: picture. (line 2282)
+* creating tables: table. (line 2676)
+* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 5747)
+* cross references: Cross references. (line 1449)
+* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 374)
+* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 1503)
+* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 1513)
+* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 6402)
+* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 6411)
+* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 6399)
+* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 6307)
+* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 6396)
+* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 5743)
+* date, today's: \today. (line 6640)
+* 'datetime' package: \today. (line 6645)
* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 2683)
+ (line 3649)
+* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 3734)
* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 2760)
-* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 2827)
-* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 2799)
-* definitions: Definitions. (line 2678)
-* description lists, creating: description. (line 1166)
-* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 4704)
-* discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany. (line 3974)
-* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation.
- (line 1944)
-* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote.
- (line 1959)
+ (line 3800)
+* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 4016)
+* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 3904)
+* definitions: Definitions. (line 3644)
+* description lists, creating: description. (line 1671)
+* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 4033)
+* Didot point: Units of length. (line 4314)
+* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 6485)
+* discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany. (line 5637)
+* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
+* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
* document class options: Document class options.
- (line 490)
+ (line 544)
* document class, defined: Starting and ending.
- (line 324)
-* document classes: Document classes. (line 459)
-* document templates: Document templates. (line 5252)
-* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 4621)
-* dot accent: Accents. (line 4713)
-* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 3923)
-* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 4713)
-* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 4742)
-* dotless i: Accents. (line 4750)
-* dotless i, math: Math accents. (line 3932)
-* dotless j: Accents. (line 4753)
-* dotless j, math: Math accents. (line 3935)
-* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 4529)
-* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 4618)
-* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 3920)
-* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 4655)
-* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 4563)
-* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 4668)
-* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 4658)
+ (line 327)
+* document classes: Document classes. (line 510)
+* document templates: Document templates. (line 7145)
+* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 6402)
+* dot accent: Accents. (line 6494)
+* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 5561)
+* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 6494)
+* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 6524)
+* dotless i: Accents. (line 6532)
+* dotless i, math: Math accents. (line 5570)
+* dotless j: Accents. (line 6535)
+* dotless j, math: Math accents. (line 5573)
+* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 6310)
+* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 6399)
+* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 5558)
+* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 6436)
+* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 6344)
+* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 6449)
+* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 6439)
* double spacing: Low-level font commands.
- (line 786)
-* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 4590)
-* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 4627)
-* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 395)
-* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 4547)
-* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 4624)
-* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 4677)
-* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 4683)
-* emphasis: Font styles. (line 610)
-* emphasis <1>: Font styles. (line 684)
-* enclosure list: \encl. (line 5119)
-* ending & starting: Starting and ending.
- (line 316)
-* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 389)
-* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 2565)
-* environments: Environments. (line 1062)
+ (line 930)
+* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 6371)
+* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 6408)
+* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 399)
+* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 6328)
+* em: Units of length. (line 4322)
+* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 6405)
+* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 6458)
+* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 6464)
+* emphasis: Font styles. (line 707)
+* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6967)
+* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 1770)
+* ending and starting: Starting and ending.
+ (line 319)
+* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 393)
+* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 3390)
+* environment: Starting and ending.
+ (line 335)
+* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 3904)
+* environments: Environments. (line 1525)
* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 2760)
-* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1050)
+ (line 3800)
+* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1513)
* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
- (line 522)
-* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 1276)
-* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 1253)
-* equations, environment for: equation. (line 1288)
+ (line 596)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 1883)
+* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 1848)
+* equations, environment for: equation. (line 1904)
* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
- (line 516)
+ (line 590)
* es-zet German letter: Non-English characters.
- (line 4829)
+ (line 6612)
* eth, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters.
- (line 4801)
-* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 4630)
-* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 4633)
+ (line 6584)
+* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 6411)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 4322)
+* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 6414)
* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 3150)
-* external files, creating: filecontents. (line 1416)
-* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 4646)
-* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1050)
-* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 1670)
-* figures, inserting: figure. (line 1301)
-* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 702)
-* 'float' package: figure. (line 1333)
+ (line 4521)
+* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 1975)
+* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 836)
+* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 6427)
+* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1513)
+* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 2269)
+* figures, inserting: figure. (line 1922)
+* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 740)
+* 'float' package: Floats. (line 1293)
+* float page: Floats. (line 1299)
* flush left equations: Document class options.
- (line 516)
-* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 2553)
+ (line 590)
+* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 3377)
+* font catalogue: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 836)
* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
- (line 740)
-* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 714)
-* font styles: Font styles. (line 580)
-* fonts: Fonts. (line 574)
-* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 2827)
-* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 4119)
+ (line 822)
+* font size: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 914)
+* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 796)
+* font styles: Font styles. (line 654)
+* fonts: Fonts. (line 648)
+* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 4016)
+* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 5782)
* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 880)
-* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1050)
+ (line 1115)
+* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1513)
* footnote parameters: Footnote parameters.
- (line 2662)
-* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 1670)
-* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 2598)
-* footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered: Symbolic footnotes.
- (line 2649)
-* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 1288)
-* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 3114)
-* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 370)
-* fragile commands: \protect. (line 2841)
-* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* functions, math: Math functions. (line 3795)
+ (line 3628)
+* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 2269)
+* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 3423)
+* Footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 3470)
+* Footnotes, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
+ (line 3524)
+* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 3458)
+* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 1904)
+* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 4484)
+* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 374)
+* fragile commands: \protect. (line 4051)
+* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* functions, math: Math functions. (line 5433)
+* 'geometry' package: Document class options.
+ (line 575)
* global options: Document class options.
- (line 490)
+ (line 544)
* global options <1>: Document class options.
- (line 567)
-* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 4995)
-* glossary package: Glossaries. (line 5004)
-* graphics packages: \line. (line 1839)
-* grave accent: Accents. (line 4725)
-* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 3926)
-* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 4636)
-* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 3159)
-* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 3917)
-* hacek accent: Accents. (line 4783)
-* hat accent: Accents. (line 4721)
-* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 3929)
-* header style: \pagestyle. (line 4119)
+ (line 641)
+* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 6778)
+* glossary package: Glossaries. (line 6787)
+* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 3770)
+* graphics packages: \line. (line 2440)
+* grave accent: Accents. (line 6506)
+* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 5564)
+* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 6417)
+* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 4554)
+* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 5555)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 6566)
+* hat accent: Accents. (line 6502)
+* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 5567)
+* header style: \pagestyle. (line 5782)
* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 880)
+ (line 1115)
* hello, world: Starting and ending.
- (line 316)
-* here, putting floats: figure. (line 1333)
-* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 4746)
-* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 2505)
-* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 2475)
-* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox. (line 4326)
+ (line 319)
+* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 1293)
+* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 6528)
+* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 3328)
+* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 3298)
+* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox. (line 6107)
* Icelandic eth: Non-English characters.
- (line 4801)
+ (line 6584)
* Icelandic thorn: Non-English characters.
- (line 4833)
+ (line 6616)
* ij letter, Dutch: Non-English characters.
- (line 4809)
-* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 389)
-* in-line formulas: math. (line 1643)
-* indent, forcing: \indent. (line 3043)
-* indent, suppressing: \noindent. (line 3054)
-* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 1666)
-* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': Indexes. (line 5020)
-* indexes: Indexes. (line 5010)
-* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 4186)
-* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 4299)
-* initial command: filecontents. (line 1424)
+ (line 6592)
+* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 393)
+* in-line formulas: math. (line 2242)
+* indent, forcing: \indent. (line 4402)
+* indent, suppressing: \noindent. (line 4413)
+* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 2265)
+* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': Indexes. (line 6803)
+* indexes: Indexes. (line 6793)
+* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 5857)
+* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 6049)
* input file: Splitting the input.
- (line 4868)
-* input/output: Terminal input/output.
- (line 5198)
-* inserting figures: figure. (line 1301)
-* italic correction: \/. (line 4229)
-* italic font: Font styles. (line 687)
-* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 1498)
-* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 1472)
-* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 290)
-* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 1166)
-* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 308)
-* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 290)
+ (line 6651)
+* input/output, to terminal: Terminal input/output.
+ (line 7091)
+* inserting figures: figure. (line 1922)
+* insertions of special characters: Special insertions. (line 6261)
+* italic correction: \/. (line 5958)
+* italic font: Font styles. (line 725)
+* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 2065)
+* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 2039)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 293)
+* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 1671)
+* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 311)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 293)
* landscape orientation: Document class options.
- (line 519)
-* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 4532)
-* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 290)
+ (line 593)
+* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 6313)
+* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 293)
* LaTeX Project team: About this document.
- (line 258)
+ (line 261)
* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e: About this document.
- (line 254)
-* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 4535)
-* layout commands: Layout. (line 810)
+ (line 257)
+* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 6316)
+* layout commands: Layout. (line 960)
* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 880)
-* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 4642)
-* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 4596)
-* left quote: Text symbols. (line 4551)
-* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 4655)
-* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 4661)
+ (line 1115)
+* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 6423)
+* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 6377)
+* left quote: Text symbols. (line 6332)
+* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 6436)
+* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 6442)
* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 522)
-* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 1472)
-* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 1459)
-* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 4023)
-* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 2988)
-* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 2975)
-* lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 2736)
-* lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths. (line 3016)
-* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 2981)
-* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 4639)
-* letters: Letters. (line 5050)
-* letters, accented: Accents. (line 4694)
-* letters, ending: \closing. (line 5109)
+ (line 596)
+* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 2039)
+* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 2026)
+* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 5686)
+* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 4347)
+* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 3770)
+* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 4262)
+* lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths. (line 4375)
+* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 4340)
+* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 6420)
+* letters, accented: Accents. (line 6475)
+* letters, ending: \closing. (line 6955)
* letters, non-English: Non-English characters.
- (line 4788)
-* letters, starting: \opening. (line 5152)
-* line break, forcing: \\. (line 2449)
-* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 2437)
+ (line 6571)
+* letters, starting: \opening. (line 7025)
+* letters, writing: Letters. (line 6833)
+* line break, forcing: \\. (line 3236)
+* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 3225)
* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 2521)
+ (line 3344)
* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 2521)
-* lines in tables: tabular. (line 2092)
-* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 662)
-* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 2092)
-* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 1974)
-* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 2910)
-* list of figures file: Output files. (line 380)
-* list of tables file: Output files. (line 380)
-* lists of items: itemize. (line 1511)
-* lists of items, generic: list. (line 1618)
-* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 1215)
+ (line 3344)
+* lines in tables: tabular. (line 2718)
+* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 782)
+* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 2718)
+* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 2585)
+* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 4158)
+* list of figures file: Output files. (line 384)
+* list of tables file: Output files. (line 384)
+* lists of items: itemize. (line 2078)
+* lists of items, generic: list. (line 2185)
+* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 1786)
* loading additional packages: Document class options.
- (line 559)
-* log file: Output files. (line 365)
-* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 4532)
-* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 4535)
-* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 4572)
-* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 4563)
+ (line 633)
+* log file: Output files. (line 369)
+* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 6313)
+* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 6316)
+* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 6353)
+* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 6344)
* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
- (line 740)
-* LR mode: Modes. (line 4023)
-* 'ltugboat' class: tugboat template. (line 5310)
-* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 412)
-* macro package, LaTeX as: Overview. (line 295)
-* macron accent: Accents. (line 4717)
-* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 3911)
-* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 1253)
-* 'makeidx' package: Indexes. (line 5032)
-* 'makeindex' program: Indexes. (line 5027)
-* making a title page: titlepage. (line 2367)
-* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 3035)
-* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 3067)
-* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 4646)
-* math accents: Math accents. (line 3903)
-* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 3114)
-* math functions: Math functions. (line 3795)
-* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 3973)
-* math mode: Modes. (line 4023)
-* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 3114)
+ (line 822)
+* LR mode: Modes. (line 5686)
+* 'ltugboat' class: tugboat template. (line 7203)
+* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 416)
+* m-width: Units of length. (line 4322)
+* macro package, LaTeX as: Overview. (line 298)
+* macron accent: Accents. (line 6498)
+* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 5549)
+* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 1848)
+* 'makeidx' package: Indexes. (line 6815)
+* 'makeindex' program: Indexes. (line 6810)
+* making a title page: titlepage. (line 3155)
+* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 4394)
+* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 4434)
+* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 6427)
+* math accents: Math accents. (line 5541)
+* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 4484)
+* math functions: Math functions. (line 5433)
+* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 5636)
+* math mode: Modes. (line 5686)
+* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 4484)
* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 3955)
-* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 3159)
-* math, bold: Font styles. (line 658)
-* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 1655)
-* modes: Modes. (line 4023)
-* monospace font: Font styles. (line 702)
-* moving arguments: \protect. (line 2841)
-* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 821)
-* multilingual support: Accents. (line 4694)
-* 'multind' package: Indexes. (line 5043)
+ (line 5593)
+* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 4554)
+* math, bold: Font styles. (line 778)
+* Millimeter: Units of length. (line 4311)
+* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 2254)
+* modes: Modes. (line 5686)
+* monospace font: Font styles. (line 740)
+* moving arguments: \protect. (line 4051)
+* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 3470)
+* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 4333)
+* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 975)
+* multilingual support: Accents. (line 6475)
+* 'multind' package: Indexes. (line 6826)
* multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math miscellany.
- (line 3974)
-* nested '\include', not allowed: \include. (line 4892)
+ (line 5637)
+* nested '\include', not allowed: \include. (line 6675)
* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 2683)
+ (line 3649)
+* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 3734)
* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 2459)
-* new line, starting: \\. (line 2449)
-* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 2468)
-* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 2559)
+ (line 3268)
+* new line, starting: \\. (line 3236)
+* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 3277)
+* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 3384)
* non-English characters: Non-English characters.
- (line 4788)
-* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 3067)
-* null delimiter: Math miscellany. (line 3988)
-* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 2910)
-* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 662)
-* oblique font: Font styles. (line 699)
+ (line 6571)
+* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 4434)
+* null delimiter: Math miscellany. (line 5651)
+* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 4158)
+* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 782)
+* oblique font: Font styles. (line 737)
* oe ligature: Non-English characters.
- (line 4825)
-* ogonek: Accents. (line 4757)
-* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 662)
-* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 815)
-* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 4551)
-* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 389)
+ (line 6608)
+* ogonek: Accents. (line 6539)
+* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 782)
+* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 965)
+* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 6332)
+* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 393)
* options, document class: Document class options.
- (line 490)
+ (line 544)
* options, global: Document class options.
- (line 567)
-* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 4646)
+ (line 641)
+* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 6427)
* oslash: Non-English characters.
- (line 4821)
-* overbar accent: Accents. (line 4717)
-* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 3923)
-* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 290)
+ (line 6604)
+* overbar accent: Accents. (line 6498)
+* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 5561)
+* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 293)
* packages, loading additional: Document class options.
- (line 559)
+ (line 633)
* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 2580)
+ (line 3405)
* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 2580)
-* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 2538)
+ (line 3405)
+* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 3361)
* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters.
- (line 880)
-* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 1040)
-* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 4094)
-* page styles: Page styles. (line 4062)
-* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 1666)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation. (line 1944)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quote. (line 1959)
-* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 4023)
-* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 4555)
-* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 3035)
+ (line 1115)
+* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 1503)
+* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 5757)
+* page styles: Page styles. (line 5725)
+* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 2265)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
+* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 5686)
+* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 6336)
+* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 4394)
* parameters, for footnotes: Footnote parameters.
- (line 2662)
+ (line 3628)
* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters.
- (line 880)
-* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 357)
-* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 395)
-* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 4649)
-* 'pict2e' package: \line. (line 1839)
-* pictures, creating: picture. (line 1683)
-* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 4555)
-* placement of floats: figure. (line 1314)
-* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 2418)
+ (line 1115)
+* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 361)
+* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 399)
+* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 6430)
+* pica: Units of length. (line 4298)
+* 'pict2e' package: \line. (line 2440)
+* pictures, creating: picture. (line 2282)
+* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 6336)
+* placement of floats: Floats. (line 1272)
+* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 3206)
+* Point: Units of length. (line 4294)
* polish l: Non-English characters.
- (line 4813)
+ (line 6596)
* portrait orientation: Document class options.
- (line 519)
-* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 5164)
-* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 4559)
+ (line 593)
+* position, in picture: picture. (line 2299)
+* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 7038)
+* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 6340)
* preamble, defined: Starting and ending.
- (line 329)
-* predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 3016)
-* prompt, '*': Command line. (line 5243)
-* pronunciation: Overview. (line 308)
-* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 4652)
-* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 4668)
-* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation.
- (line 1944)
-* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quote.
- (line 1959)
-* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 1498)
-* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 1485)
-* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 1472)
-* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 1459)
+ (line 332)
+* predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 4375)
+* prompt, '*': Command line. (line 7136)
+* pronunciation: Overview. (line 311)
+* quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 5619)
+* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 6433)
+* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 6449)
+* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
+* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
+* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 2065)
+* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 2052)
+* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 2039)
+* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 2026)
* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 2760)
-* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 370)
-* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 4671)
-* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 3067)
+ (line 3800)
+* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 374)
+* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 6452)
+* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 4434)
* reporting bugs: About this document.
- (line 247)
+ (line 250)
* reserved characters: Reserved characters.
- (line 4486)
-* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 4674)
-* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 4599)
-* right quote: Text symbols. (line 4566)
-* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 4658)
-* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 4664)
+ (line 6267)
+* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 6455)
+* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 6380)
+* right quote: Text symbols. (line 6347)
+* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 6439)
+* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 6445)
* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 522)
-* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 1498)
-* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 1485)
-* ring accent: Accents. (line 4762)
-* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 3938)
-* robust commands: \protect. (line 2851)
-* roman font: Font styles. (line 690)
+ (line 596)
+* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 2065)
+* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 2052)
+* ring accent: Accents. (line 6544)
+* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 5576)
+* robust commands: \protect. (line 4051)
+* roman font: Font styles. (line 728)
+* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 3770)
* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
- (line 880)
-* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 4119)
-* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 696)
-* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 681)
-* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1050)
-* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 990)
-* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 4569)
-* sectioning: Sectioning. (line 949)
+ (line 1115)
+* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 5782)
+* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 734)
+* Scaled point: Units of length. (line 4320)
+* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 722)
+* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1513)
+* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 1438)
+* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 6350)
+* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 1397)
+* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 861)
* 'setspace' package: Low-level font commands.
- (line 786)
-* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 2935)
+ (line 930)
+* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 4213)
+* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 901)
* sharp S letters: Non-English characters.
- (line 4829)
-* 'showidx' package: Indexes. (line 5039)
-* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 2384)
-* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 4541)
-* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 4661)
-* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 4563)
-* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 4664)
-* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 714)
-* slanted font: Font styles. (line 699)
-* small caps font: Font styles. (line 693)
-* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 4267)
-* spaces: Spaces. (line 4162)
+ (line 6612)
+* 'showidx' package: Indexes. (line 6822)
+* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 3172)
+* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 6322)
+* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 6442)
+* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 6344)
+* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 6445)
+* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 796)
+* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 3770)
+* slanted font: Font styles. (line 737)
+* small caps font: Font styles. (line 731)
+* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 6006)
+* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 6075)
+* spaces: Spaces. (line 5825)
* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 3955)
-* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 4646)
+ (line 5593)
+* spacing, intersentence: \frenchspacing. (line 5938)
+* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 6427)
* special characters: Non-English characters.
- (line 4788)
-* specifier, float placement: figure. (line 1314)
+ (line 6571)
+* special insertions: Special insertions. (line 6261)
+* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 1272)
* splitting the input file: Splitting the input.
- (line 4868)
-* starting & ending: Starting and ending.
- (line 316)
-* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 2559)
-* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage. (line 2553)
-* starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 2545)
-* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 4559)
-* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 4668)
-* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 4668)
-* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 4186)
-* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 4299)
-* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 874)
-* styles of text: Font styles. (line 580)
-* styles, page: Page styles. (line 4062)
+ (line 6651)
+* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 3384)
+* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage. (line 3377)
+* starting and ending: Starting and ending.
+ (line 319)
+* starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 3368)
+* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 6340)
+* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 6449)
+* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 6449)
+* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 5857)
+* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 6049)
+* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 1103)
+* styles of text: Font styles. (line 654)
+* styles, page: Page styles. (line 5725)
* subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 3150)
+ (line 4521)
* superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 3150)
-* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 3159)
-* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 1974)
+ (line 4521)
+* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 4554)
+* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 6298)
+* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 2585)
* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline.
- (line 4951)
-* table of contents file: Output files. (line 380)
-* table of contents, creating: Tables of contents. (line 4930)
-* tables, creating: table. (line 2065)
+ (line 6734)
+* table of contents file: Output files. (line 384)
+* table of contents, creating: Tables of contents. (line 6713)
+* tables, creating: table. (line 2676)
+* template, 'beamer': beamer template. (line 7152)
+* template, 'book': book template. (line 7183)
+* template, TUGboat: tugboat template. (line 7203)
+* templates, document: Document templates. (line 7145)
* terminal input/output: Terminal input/output.
- (line 5198)
-* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 4572)
-* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 4517)
-* 'textcomp' package: Font styles. (line 662)
-* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 4084)
-* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 2799)
-* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 2354)
+ (line 7091)
+* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 6353)
+* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 6298)
+* 'textcomp' package: Font styles. (line 782)
+* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 5747)
+* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 3904)
+* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 3904)
+* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 3142)
* thorn, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters.
- (line 4833)
-* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 4677)
-* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 4768)
-* tilde accent: Accents. (line 4731)
-* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 3941)
-* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 4578)
+ (line 6616)
+* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 6458)
+* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 6550)
+* tilde accent: Accents. (line 6512)
+* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 5579)
+* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 6359)
* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
- (line 530)
-* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 2367)
-* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 4088)
-* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 4068)
-* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 4680)
-* transcript file: Output files. (line 365)
-* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 389)
-* TUGboat template: tugboat template. (line 5310)
-* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 821)
-* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 4683)
-* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 2384)
-* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 714)
-* typeface styles: Font styles. (line 580)
-* typefaces: Fonts. (line 574)
-* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 702)
-* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 1178)
-* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 4704)
-* underbar: Accents. (line 4776)
-* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 4686)
-* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 389)
+ (line 604)
+* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 3155)
+* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 5751)
+* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 5731)
+* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 6461)
+* transcript file: Output files. (line 369)
+* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 393)
+* TUGboat template: tugboat template. (line 7203)
+* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 975)
+* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 6464)
+* type styles: Font styles. (line 654)
+* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 3172)
+* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 796)
+* typefaces: Fonts. (line 648)
+* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 740)
+* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 1688)
+* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 6485)
+* underbar: Accents. (line 6558)
+* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 6467)
+* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 393)
+* units, of length: Units of length. (line 4290)
* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document.
- (line 258)
-* unordered lists: itemize. (line 1511)
-* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 2317)
-* UTF-8: TeX engines. (line 389)
-* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 2862)
-* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 3944)
-* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 2384)
-* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 2401)
-* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 4590)
-* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 4587)
-* vertical space: \addvspace. (line 4267)
-* vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip. (line 3061)
-* visible space: \verb. (line 2412)
-* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 4689)
-* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 3947)
-* wide tile accent, math: Math accents. (line 3950)
-* writing external files: filecontents. (line 1416)
-* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 421)
-* 'xindy' program: Indexes. (line 5027)
+ (line 261)
+* unordered lists: itemize. (line 2078)
+* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 3105)
+* UTF-8: TeX engines. (line 393)
+* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 4100)
+* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 5582)
+* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 3172)
+* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 3189)
+* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 6371)
+* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 6368)
+* vertical space: \addvspace. (line 6006)
+* vertical space <1>: \vspace. (line 6075)
+* vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip. (line 4428)
+* visible space: \verb. (line 3200)
+* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 6470)
+* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 871)
+* white space: Spaces. (line 5825)
+* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 5585)
+* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 5588)
+* widths, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 883)
+* writing external files: filecontents. (line 1975)
+* writing letters: Letters. (line 6833)
+* x-height: Units of length. (line 4322)
+* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 425)
+* 'xindy' program: Indexes. (line 6810)
Command Index
*************
* Menu:
-* $: Math formulas. (line 3132)
-* --help command-line option: Command line. (line 5239)
-* .aux file: Output files. (line 370)
-* .dvi file: Output files. (line 347)
-* .lof file: Output files. (line 380)
-* .lof file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 4940)
-* .log file: Output files. (line 365)
-* .lot file: Output files. (line 380)
-* .lot file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 4940)
-* .pdf file: Output files. (line 357)
-* .tex, default extension: Command line. (line 5231)
-* .toc file: Output files. (line 380)
-* .toc file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 4930)
+* $: Math formulas. (line 4502)
+* &: tabular. (line 2744)
+* --help command-line option: Command line. (line 7132)
+* .aux file: Output files. (line 374)
+* .dvi file: Output files. (line 351)
+* .fd file: \newfont. (line 4026)
+* .lof file: Output files. (line 384)
+* .lof file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 6723)
+* .log file: Output files. (line 369)
+* .lot file: Output files. (line 384)
+* .lot file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 6723)
+* .pdf file: Output files. (line 361)
+* .tex, default extension: Command line. (line 7124)
+* .toc file: Output files. (line 384)
+* .toc file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 6713)
+* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 425)
* 10pt option: Document class options.
- (line 498)
+ (line 552)
* 11pt option: Document class options.
- (line 498)
+ (line 552)
* 12pt option: Document class options.
- (line 498)
-* @{...}: array. (line 1107)
+ (line 552)
* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 435)
+ (line 444)
* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 435)
-* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 4704)
+ (line 444)
+* \!: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 5616)
+* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 6485)
* \#: Reserved characters.
- (line 4491)
+ (line 6272)
* \$: Reserved characters.
- (line 4491)
+ (line 6272)
* \%: Reserved characters.
- (line 4491)
+ (line 6272)
* \&: Reserved characters.
- (line 4491)
-* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 4708)
-* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2013)
-* \(: Math formulas. (line 3124)
-* \): Math formulas. (line 3124)
-* \*: Math miscellany. (line 3973)
-* \+: tabbing. (line 2005)
+ (line 6272)
+* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 6489)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2624)
+* \(: Math formulas. (line 4494)
+* \(SPACE): \(SPACE) and \@. (line 5867)
+* \): Math formulas. (line 4494)
+* \*: Math miscellany. (line 5636)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 2616)
* \,: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 3966)
-* \-: tabbing. (line 2009)
-* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 2475)
-* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 4713)
-* \/: \/. (line 4229)
+ (line 5612)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 2620)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 3298)
+* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 6494)
+* \/: \/. (line 5958)
* \:: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 3964)
+ (line 5608)
* \;: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 3961)
-* \<: tabbing. (line 2001)
-* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 4717)
-* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1995)
-* \>: tabbing. (line 1999)
+ (line 5603)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 2612)
+* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 6498)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2606)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 2610)
* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 3964)
-* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1998)
-* \@: \@. (line 4207)
-* \@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes. (line 2654)
-* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2028)
-* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2029)
-* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2029)
+ (line 5608)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2609)
+* \@: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 5867)
+* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 3458)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2639)
+* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2640)
+* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2640)
* \aa (aa): Non-English characters.
- (line 4793)
+ (line 6576)
* \AA (AA): Non-English characters.
- (line 4793)
-* \acute: Math accents. (line 3907)
-* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 4951)
-* \address: \address. (line 5086)
-* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 4980)
-* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 2945)
-* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 2988)
-* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 4267)
+ (line 6576)
+* \acute: Math accents. (line 5545)
+* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 6734)
+* \address: \address. (line 6913)
+* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 6763)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 4224)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 4347)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6006)
* \ae (ae): Non-English characters.
- (line 4797)
+ (line 6580)
* \AE (AE): Non-English characters.
- (line 4797)
-* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 3167)
+ (line 6580)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 4567)
* \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 2880)
+ (line 4128)
* \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 2883)
-* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 1248)
-* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 3170)
-* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 5024)
-* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 3173)
-* \and for '\author': \maketitle. (line 4074)
-* \angle: Math symbols. (line 3176)
-* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 980)
-* \approx: Math symbols. (line 3179)
+ (line 4131)
+* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 1832)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 4570)
+* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 6807)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 4573)
+* \and for '\author': \maketitle. (line 5737)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 4576)
+* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 1428)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 4581)
* \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 2886)
-* \arccos: Math functions. (line 3798)
-* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 3801)
-* \arctan: Math functions. (line 3804)
-* \arg: Math functions. (line 3807)
-* \arraycolsep: array. (line 1119)
-* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 2186)
-* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 2190)
-* \ast: Math symbols. (line 3182)
-* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 3185)
-* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 4073)
-* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2029)
-* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 4734)
-* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 3188)
+ (line 4134)
+* \arccos: Math functions. (line 5436)
+* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 5439)
+* \arctan: Math functions. (line 5442)
+* \arg: Math functions. (line 5445)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 1579)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 2868)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 2874)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 4584)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 4593)
+* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 1757)
+* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 1770)
+* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 5736)
+* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2640)
+* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 6515)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 4596)
* \backslash <1>: Reserved characters.
- (line 4496)
-* \bar: Math accents. (line 3910)
+ (line 6277)
+* \bar: Math accents. (line 5548)
* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
- (line 780)
+ (line 914)
* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands.
- (line 786)
-* \begin: Environments. (line 1062)
-* \beta: Math symbols. (line 3191)
-* \bf: Font styles. (line 677)
-* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 616)
-* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 2278)
-* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 2317)
-* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 2317)
-* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 3194)
-* \bigcap <1>: Math symbols. (line 3224)
-* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 3197)
-* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 3200)
-* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 3203)
-* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 3206)
-* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 3209)
+ (line 924)
+* \begin: Environments. (line 1525)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 4600)
+* \bf: Font styles. (line 718)
+* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 687)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 3065)
+* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 3105)
+* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 3105)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 4603)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 4607)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 4611)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 4615)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 4618)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 4621)
* \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 4282)
+ (line 6032)
* \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 4282)
-* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 3218)
-* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 3212)
-* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 3215)
-* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 3221)
-* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 3227)
-* \bmod: Math functions. (line 3810)
-* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 3137)
-* \bot: Math symbols. (line 3230)
-* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 1362)
-* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 3233)
-* \Box: Math symbols. (line 3236)
-* \breve: Math accents. (line 3913)
-* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 3239)
-* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 4738)
-* \cal: Font styles. (line 680)
-* \cap: Math symbols. (line 3242)
-* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 4708)
-* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 4773)
-* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 4783)
-* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 4738)
-* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 4721)
-* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 4704)
-* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 4742)
-* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 4725)
-* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 4746)
-* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 4717)
-* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 4768)
-* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 4757)
-* \capitalring: Accents. (line 4762)
-* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 4768)
-* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 4731)
-* \caption: figure. (line 1355)
-* \cc: \cc. (line 5099)
-* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 3245)
-* \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 3977)
-* \centering: \centering. (line 1143)
-* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 952)
-* \check: Math accents. (line 3916)
-* \chi: Math symbols. (line 3248)
-* \circ: Math symbols. (line 3251)
-* \circle: \circle. (line 1753)
-* \cite: \cite. (line 2295)
-* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 2545)
-* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 2553)
-* \cline: \cline. (line 2228)
-* \closing: \closing. (line 5109)
-* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 3254)
-* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 831)
-* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 834)
-* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 838)
-* \cong: Math symbols. (line 3257)
-* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 4974)
-* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 3260)
-* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 4521)
-* \cos: Math functions. (line 3813)
-* \cosh: Math functions. (line 3816)
-* \cot: Math functions. (line 3819)
-* \coth: Math functions. (line 3822)
-* \csc: Math functions. (line 3825)
-* \cup: Math symbols. (line 3263)
-* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 4742)
-* \dag: Text symbols. (line 4525)
-* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 3266)
-* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 1806)
-* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 3269)
-* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 4079)
-* \day: \day \month \year. (line 2964)
-* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 849)
-* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 853)
-* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 858)
-* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 844)
-* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 4528)
-* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 3272)
-* \ddot: Math accents. (line 3919)
-* \ddots: Math miscellany. (line 3981)
-* \deg: Math functions. (line 3828)
-* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 3275)
-* \delta: Math symbols. (line 3278)
-* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 3020)
-* \det: Math functions. (line 3831)
+ (line 6032)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 4632)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 4624)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 4628)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 4635)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 4639)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 4642)
+* \bmod: Math functions. (line 5448)
+* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 4507)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 4645)
+* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 1335)
+* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1336)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 4649)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 4652)
+* \breve: Math accents. (line 5551)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 4657)
+* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 6520)
+* \cal: Font styles. (line 721)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 4660)
+* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 6489)
+* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 6555)
+* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 6566)
+* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 6520)
+* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 6502)
+* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 6485)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 6524)
+* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 6506)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 6528)
+* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 6498)
+* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 6550)
+* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 6539)
+* \capitalring: Accents. (line 6544)
+* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 6550)
+* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 6512)
+* \caption: figure. (line 1956)
+* \caption <1>: table. (line 2696)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 6940)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 4665)
+* \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 5640)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 1639)
+* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 1400)
+* \check: Math accents. (line 5554)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 4668)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 4671)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 2352)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 3083)
+* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 3368)
+* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 3377)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 3001)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 6955)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 4676)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 990)
+* \columnsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1115)
+* \columnsep <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1118)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 996)
+* \columnseprule <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1116)
+* \columnseprule <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1118)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 1003)
+* \columnwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1117)
+* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1118)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 4679)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 4685)
+* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 6757)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 4688)
+* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 6302)
+* \cos: Math functions. (line 5451)
+* \cosh: Math functions. (line 5454)
+* \cot: Math functions. (line 5457)
+* \coth: Math functions. (line 5460)
+* \csc: Math functions. (line 5463)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 4691)
+* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 6524)
+* \dag: Text symbols. (line 6306)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 4696)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 2407)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 4699)
+* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 5742)
+* \day: \day \month \year. (line 4251)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 1037)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1043)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1050)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 1015)
+* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 1055)
+* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 6309)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 4703)
+* \ddot: Math accents. (line 5557)
+* \ddots: Math miscellany. (line 5644)
+* \deg: Math functions. (line 5466)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 4706)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 4709)
+* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 4379)
+* \det: Math functions. (line 5469)
* \dh (d): Non-English characters.
- (line 4801)
+ (line 6584)
* \DH (D): Non-English characters.
- (line 4801)
-* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 3281)
-* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 3284)
-* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 3287)
-* \dim: Math functions. (line 3834)
-* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 3142)
-* \div: Math symbols. (line 3290)
+ (line 6584)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 4712)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 4716)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 4720)
+* \dim: Math functions. (line 5472)
+* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 4512)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 4723)
* \dj: Non-English characters.
- (line 4805)
+ (line 6588)
* \DJ: Non-English characters.
- (line 4805)
-* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 459)
-* \documentclass, commands before: filecontents. (line 1424)
-* \dot: Math accents. (line 3922)
-* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 3293)
-* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 4261)
-* \dots: Text symbols. (line 4545)
-* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 2194)
-* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 3296)
-* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 3299)
-* \ell: Math symbols. (line 3302)
-* \em: Font styles. (line 683)
-* \emph: Font styles. (line 610)
-* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 3305)
-* \encl: \encl. (line 5119)
-* \end: Environments. (line 1062)
-* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 2565)
-* \enumi: enumerate. (line 1238)
-* \enumii: enumerate. (line 1238)
-* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 1238)
-* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 1238)
-* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 3308)
-* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 3311)
-* \eta: Math symbols. (line 3314)
+ (line 6588)
+* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 510)
+* \dot: Math accents. (line 5560)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 4726)
+* \dotfill: \hrulefill \dotfill.
+ (line 5983)
+* \dots: Text symbols. (line 6326)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 2879)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 4730)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 4734)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 4738)
+* \emph: Font styles. (line 707)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 4741)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 6967)
+* \end: Environments. (line 1525)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 3390)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 1822)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 1822)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 1822)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 1822)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 4745)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 4750)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 4753)
* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 541)
-* \exists: Math symbols. (line 3317)
-* \exp: Math functions. (line 3837)
-* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 2157)
+ (line 615)
+* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1176)
+* \evensidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1177)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 4756)
+* \exp: Math functions. (line 5475)
+* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 2827)
* \fbox: \fbox and \framebox.
- (line 4333)
+ (line 6114)
* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture).
- (line 1800)
+ (line 2401)
* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox and \framebox.
- (line 4345)
+ (line 6126)
* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture).
- (line 1800)
+ (line 2401)
* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox.
- (line 4345)
-* \fill: \hfill. (line 4189)
-* \flat: Math symbols. (line 3320)
-* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 1365)
-* \floatsep: figure. (line 1380)
-* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 865)
+ (line 6126)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 5860)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 4759)
+* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 1339)
+* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 1340)
+* \floatsep: Floats. (line 1355)
+* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 1356)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 1084)
* \fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 2895)
-* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes. (line 2654)
+ (line 4143)
+* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 3458)
* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
- (line 745)
+ (line 827)
* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
- (line 748)
+ (line 836)
* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
- (line 757)
+ (line 861)
* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
- (line 768)
+ (line 901)
* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
- (line 780)
-* \footnote: \footnote. (line 2605)
-* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 2620)
+ (line 914)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 3441)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 3479)
* \footnoterule: Footnote parameters.
- (line 2662)
+ (line 3628)
* \footnotesep: Footnote parameters.
- (line 2668)
-* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 2635)
+ (line 3634)
+* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 3511)
* \footskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 890)
-* \forall: Math symbols. (line 3323)
-* \frac: Math miscellany. (line 3985)
-* \frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany. (line 3984)
-* \frame: \frame. (line 1821)
+ (line 1135)
+* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1136)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 4762)
+* \frac: Math miscellany. (line 5648)
+* \frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany. (line 5647)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 2422)
* \framebox: \framebox (picture).
- (line 1792)
+ (line 2393)
* \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox.
- (line 4333)
-* \frown: Math symbols. (line 3326)
-* \fussy: \fussy. (line 2487)
-* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 3329)
-* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 3332)
-* \gcd: Math functions. (line 3840)
-* \ge: Math symbols. (line 3335)
-* \geq: Math symbols. (line 3338)
-* \gets: Math symbols. (line 3341)
-* \gg: Math symbols. (line 3344)
-* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 4997)
-* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 5000)
-* \grave: Math accents. (line 3925)
-* \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 4537)
-* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 4538)
-* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 4539)
-* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 4540)
-* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 4746)
-* \hat: Math accents. (line 3928)
-* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 3347)
+ (line 6114)
+* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 5938)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 4765)
+* \fussy: \fussy. (line 3310)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 4768)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 4771)
+* \gcd: Math functions. (line 5478)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 4774)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 4778)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 4782)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 4785)
+* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 6780)
+* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 6783)
+* \grave: Math accents. (line 5563)
+* \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 6318)
+* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 6319)
+* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 6320)
+* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 6321)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 6528)
+* \hat: Math accents. (line 5566)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 4789)
* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 880)
+ (line 1123)
+* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1124)
* \headsep: Page layout parameters.
- (line 885)
-* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 3350)
-* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 3018)
-* \hfill: \hfill. (line 4186)
-* \hline: \hline. (line 2239)
-* \hom: Math functions. (line 3843)
-* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3353)
-* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3356)
-* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 4254)
+ (line 1128)
+* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1129)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 4792)
+* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 4377)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 5857)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 3023)
+* \hom: Math functions. (line 5481)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 4795)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 4798)
+* \hrulefill: \hrulefill \dotfill.
+ (line 5983)
* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
- (line 930)
-* \hspace: \hspace. (line 4171)
-* \huge: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 2505)
-* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 4750)
-* \iff: Math symbols. (line 3359)
+ (line 1228)
+* \hsize <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1228)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 5830)
+* \huge: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 3328)
+* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 6532)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 4801)
* \ij (ij): Non-English characters.
- (line 4809)
+ (line 6592)
* \IJ (IJ): Non-English characters.
- (line 4809)
-* \Im: Math symbols. (line 3362)
-* \imath: Math accents. (line 3931)
-* \in: Math symbols. (line 3365)
-* \include: \include. (line 4880)
-* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 4898)
-* \indent: \indent. (line 3043)
-* \index: Indexes. (line 5013)
-* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 5016)
-* \inf: Math functions. (line 3846)
-* \infty: Math symbols. (line 3368)
-* \input: \input. (line 4912)
-* \int: Math symbols. (line 3371)
-* \intextsep: figure. (line 1384)
-* \iota: Math symbols. (line 3374)
-* \it: Font styles. (line 686)
-* \item: description. (line 1174)
-* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 1228)
-* \item <2>: itemize. (line 1511)
-* \itemindent: itemize. (line 1554)
-* \itemsep: itemize. (line 1576)
-* \itshape: Font styles. (line 607)
-* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 4753)
-* \jmath: Math accents. (line 3934)
-* \Join: Math symbols. (line 3377)
-* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 4757)
-* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 3380)
-* \ker: Math functions. (line 3849)
-* \kill: tabbing. (line 2033)
+ (line 6592)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 4805)
+* \imath: Math accents. (line 5569)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 4808)
+* \include: \include. (line 6663)
+* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6681)
+* \indent: \indent. (line 4402)
+* \index: Indexes. (line 6796)
+* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 6799)
+* \inf: Math functions. (line 5484)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 4813)
+* \input: \input. (line 6695)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 4816)
+* \intextsep: Floats. (line 1359)
+* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 1360)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 4819)
+* \it: Font styles. (line 724)
+* \item: description. (line 1679)
+* \item <1>: description. (line 1684)
+* \item <2>: enumerate. (line 1798)
+* \item <3>: itemize. (line 2078)
+* \itemindent: itemize. (line 2121)
+* \itemsep: itemize. (line 2143)
+* \itshape: Font styles. (line 681)
+* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 6535)
+* \jmath: Math accents. (line 5572)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 4822)
+* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 6539)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 4826)
+* \ker: Math functions. (line 5487)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 2644)
* \l (/l): Non-English characters.
- (line 4813)
+ (line 6596)
* \L (/L): Non-English characters.
- (line 4813)
-* \label: \label. (line 1007)
-* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 1242)
-* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 1242)
-* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 1242)
-* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 1242)
-* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 1534)
-* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 1534)
-* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 1534)
-* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 1534)
-* \labelsep: itemize. (line 1557)
-* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 1560)
-* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 3383)
-* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 3386)
-* \land: Math symbols. (line 3389)
-* \langle: Math symbols. (line 3392)
-* \large: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \Large: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 4531)
-* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 4534)
-* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 3395)
-* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 3398)
-* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 3401)
-* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 4544)
-* \le: Math symbols. (line 3404)
-* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 3407)
-* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 3987)
-* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3409)
-* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3412)
-* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 1281)
-* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 3415)
-* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 3418)
-* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 1541)
-* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 1541)
-* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 1541)
-* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 1541)
-* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 1541)
-* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 1541)
-* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 1541)
-* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3421)
-* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3424)
-* \leq: Math symbols. (line 3427)
-* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 3430)
-* \lg: Math functions. (line 3852)
-* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 3433)
-* \lim: Math functions. (line 3855)
-* \liminf: Math functions. (line 3858)
-* \limsup: Math functions. (line 3861)
-* \line: \line. (line 1832)
+ (line 6596)
+* \label: \label. (line 1455)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 1827)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 1827)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 1827)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 1827)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 2101)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 2101)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 2101)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 2101)
+* \labelsep: itemize. (line 2124)
+* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 2127)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 4829)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 4832)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 4835)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 4840)
+* \large: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \Large: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 6312)
+* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 6315)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 4845)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 4849)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 4853)
+* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 6325)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 4857)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 4861)
+* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 5650)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 4868)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 4873)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 1888)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 4877)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 4880)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 2108)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 2108)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 2108)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 2108)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 2108)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 2108)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 2108)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 4883)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 4888)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 4893)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 4897)
+* \lg: Math functions. (line 5490)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 4900)
+* \lim: Math functions. (line 5493)
+* \liminf: Math functions. (line 5496)
+* \limsup: Math functions. (line 5499)
+* \line: \line. (line 2433)
* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 2521)
+ (line 3344)
* \linespread: Low-level font commands.
- (line 793)
-* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 1846)
+ (line 937)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 2447)
* \linewidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 895)
-* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 4940)
-* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 4940)
-* \listparindent: itemize. (line 1563)
-* \ll: Math symbols. (line 3436)
-* \ln: Math functions. (line 3864)
-* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 3439)
-* \location: \location. (line 5128)
-* \log: Math functions. (line 3867)
-* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3442)
-* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3445)
-* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 3448)
-* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3451)
-* \lor: Math symbols. (line 3454)
-* \lq: Text symbols. (line 4550)
-* \makebox: \makebox. (line 4365)
-* \makebox (for 'picture'): \makebox (picture). (line 1765)
-* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 4995)
-* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 5010)
-* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 5136)
-* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 4068)
-* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 3457)
-* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 3067)
-* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 3094)
-* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 3098)
-* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 3102)
-* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 4142)
-* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 4149)
-* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 640)
-* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 656)
-* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 653)
-* \mathring: Math accents. (line 3937)
-* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 637)
-* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 643)
-* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 646)
-* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 658)
-* \max: Math functions. (line 3870)
-* \mbox: \mbox. (line 4326)
-* \mbox, and LR mode: Modes. (line 4041)
-* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 613)
+ (line 1142)
+* \linewidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1143)
+* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 6723)
+* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 6723)
+* \listparindent: itemize. (line 2130)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 4907)
+* \ln: Math functions. (line 5502)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 4911)
+* \location: \location. (line 6983)
+* \log: Math functions. (line 5505)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 4914)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 4919)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 4923)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 4928)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 4933)
+* \lq: Text symbols. (line 6331)
+* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6146)
+* \makebox (for 'picture'): \makebox (picture). (line 2365)
+* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 6778)
+* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 6793)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6993)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 5731)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 4936)
+* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 4434)
+* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1149)
+* \marginparpush <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1152)
+* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 4464)
+* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 4468)
+* \marginparwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1151)
+* \marginparwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1152)
+* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 4472)
+* \marginsep: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1150)
+* \marginsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1152)
+* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 5805)
+* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 5812)
+* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 760)
+* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 776)
+* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 773)
+* \mathring: Math accents. (line 5575)
+* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 757)
+* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 763)
+* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 766)
+* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 778)
+* \max: Math functions. (line 5508)
+* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6107)
+* \mbox, and LR mode: Modes. (line 5704)
+* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 684)
* \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 4287)
+ (line 6037)
* \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 4287)
-* \mho: Math symbols. (line 3460)
-* \mid: Math symbols. (line 3462)
-* \min: Math functions. (line 3873)
-* \models: Math symbols. (line 3465)
-* \month: \day \month \year. (line 2964)
-* \mp: Math symbols. (line 3468)
-* \mu: Math symbols. (line 3471)
-* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 2206)
-* \multiput: \multiput. (line 1870)
-* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 3474)
-* \name: \name. (line 5144)
-* \natural: Math symbols. (line 3477)
-* \ne: Math symbols. (line 3480)
-* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 3483)
-* \neg: Math symbols. (line 3486)
-* \neq: Math symbols. (line 3489)
+ (line 6037)
+* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 5608)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 4940)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 4945)
+* \min: Math functions. (line 5511)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 4955)
+* \month: \day \month \year. (line 4251)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 4960)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 4963)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 2894)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 2471)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 4966)
+* \name: \name. (line 7015)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 4969)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 4972)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 4975)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 4978)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 4982)
* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 2683)
-* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 2721)
+ (line 3649)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 3749)
* \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 2760)
-* \newfont: \newfont. (line 2827)
-* \newlength: \newlength. (line 2736)
-* \newline: \newline. (line 2468)
-* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 4196)
-* \newpage: \newpage. (line 2559)
-* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 2750)
-* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 2799)
-* \newtie: Accents. (line 4768)
+ (line 3800)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 4016)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 3770)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 3277)
+* \NEWLINE: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 5867)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 3384)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 3785)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 3904)
+* \newtie: Accents. (line 6550)
* \ng: Non-English characters.
- (line 4817)
+ (line 6600)
* \NG: Non-English characters.
- (line 4817)
-* \ni: Math symbols. (line 3492)
-* \nocite: \nocite. (line 2309)
-* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 595)
-* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 595)
-* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 4945)
-* \noindent: \noindent. (line 3054)
+ (line 6600)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 4985)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 3097)
+* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 669)
+* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 669)
+* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 6728)
+* \noindent: \noindent. (line 4413)
* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 2521)
-* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 1276)
+ (line 3344)
+* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 5938)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 1883)
* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 2580)
-* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 634)
-* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 3082)
-* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \not: Math symbols. (line 3495)
-* \notin: Math symbols. (line 3498)
-* \nu: Math symbols. (line 3501)
-* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 3504)
+ (line 3405)
+* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 705)
+* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 4452)
+* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 4990)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 4998)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 5002)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 5005)
* \o (/o): Non-English characters.
- (line 4821)
+ (line 6604)
* \O (/O): Non-English characters.
- (line 4821)
+ (line 6604)
* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 2459)
+ (line 3268)
* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 541)
-* \odot: Math symbols. (line 3507)
+ (line 615)
+* \oddsidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1175)
+* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1177)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 5008)
* \oe (oe): Non-English characters.
- (line 4825)
+ (line 6608)
* \OE (OE): Non-English characters.
- (line 4825)
-* \oint: Math symbols. (line 3510)
-* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 662)
-* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 3513)
-* \omega: Math symbols. (line 3516)
-* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 3519)
-* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 815)
-* \opening: \opening. (line 5152)
-* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 3522)
-* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 3525)
-* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 3528)
-* \oval: \oval. (line 1880)
-* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 3992)
-* \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 3996)
-* \owns: Math symbols. (line 3531)
-* \P: Text symbols. (line 4553)
+ (line 6608)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 5013)
+* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 782)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 5017)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 5020)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 5023)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 965)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 7025)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 5026)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 5030)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 5033)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 2482)
+* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 5655)
+* \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 5659)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 5038)
+* \P: Text symbols. (line 6334)
* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 2580)
-* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 4094)
-* \pageref: \pageref. (line 1040)
-* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 4119)
-* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 957)
-* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 3534)
-* \parbox: \parbox. (line 4390)
-* \parindent: minipage. (line 1666)
-* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 3043)
-* \parsep: itemize. (line 1581)
-* \parskip: \parskip. (line 3061)
-* \parskip example: itemize. (line 1597)
-* \part: Sectioning. (line 951)
-* \partial: Math symbols. (line 3537)
-* \partopsep: itemize. (line 1591)
-* \perp: Math symbols. (line 3540)
-* \phi: Math symbols. (line 3543)
-* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 3546)
-* \pi: Math symbols. (line 3549)
-* \pm: Math symbols. (line 3552)
-* \pmod: Math functions. (line 3876)
-* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 2039)
-* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 2040)
-* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 4557)
-* \Pr: Math functions. (line 3879)
-* \prec: Math symbols. (line 3555)
-* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 3558)
-* \prime: Math symbols. (line 3561)
-* \prod: Math symbols. (line 3564)
-* \propto: Math symbols. (line 3567)
-* \protect: \protect. (line 2841)
-* \ps: \ps. (line 5164)
-* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 3570)
-* \psi: Math symbols. (line 3573)
-* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 2042)
-* \put: \put. (line 1904)
-* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 4561)
-* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 4562)
-* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 4762)
-* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 874)
-* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 1498)
-* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 1472)
-* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 4430)
-* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 3576)
-* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 3579)
-* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 3582)
-* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 3585)
-* \Re: Math symbols. (line 3588)
-* \ref: \ref. (line 1050)
-* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 2951)
+ (line 3405)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 5757)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 1503)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 5782)
+* \paperheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1188)
+* \paperheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1189)
+* \paperwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1194)
+* \paperwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1195)
+* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 1405)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 5043)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6171)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 2265)
+* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 4402)
+* \parsep: itemize. (line 2148)
+* \parskip: \parskip. (line 4428)
+* \parskip example: itemize. (line 2164)
+* \part: Sectioning. (line 1399)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 5046)
+* \partopsep: itemize. (line 2158)
+* \pdfpageheight: Document class options.
+ (line 575)
+* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
+ (line 575)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 5049)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 5054)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 5058)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 5061)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 5065)
+* \pmod: Math functions. (line 5514)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 2650)
+* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 2651)
+* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 6338)
+* \Pr: Math functions. (line 5517)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 5068)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 5071)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 5076)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 5087)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 5090)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 4051)
+* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 3734)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 7038)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 5093)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 5096)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 2653)
+* \put: \put. (line 2509)
+* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 5625)
+* \quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 5619)
+* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 6342)
+* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 6343)
+* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 6544)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 1103)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 2065)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 2039)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6211)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 5099)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 5103)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 5107)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 5111)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 5114)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 1513)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 4230)
* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 2760)
+ (line 3800)
* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 2459)
-* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 3082)
-* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 3591)
-* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 3594)
-* \rho: Math symbols. (line 3597)
-* \right: Math miscellany. (line 3988)
-* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3600)
-* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3603)
-* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 3606)
-* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 3609)
-* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 3612)
-* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 1567)
-* \rm: Font styles. (line 689)
-* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 604)
+ (line 3268)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 5119)
+* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 4452)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 5124)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 5128)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 5135)
+* \right: Math miscellany. (line 5651)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 5139)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 5143)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 5148)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 5151)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 5154)
+* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 2134)
+* \rm: Font styles. (line 727)
+* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 678)
* \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 2889)
+ (line 4137)
* \Roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 2892)
-* \rq: Text symbols. (line 4565)
-* \rule: \rule. (line 4838)
-* \S: Text symbols. (line 4568)
-* \savebox: \savebox. (line 4446)
-* \sbox: \sbox. (line 4458)
-* \sc: Font styles. (line 692)
-* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \scshape: Font styles. (line 628)
-* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 3615)
-* \sec: Math functions. (line 3882)
-* \section: Sectioning. (line 954)
-* \seename: Indexes. (line 5024)
+ (line 4140)
+* \rq: Text symbols. (line 6346)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 6621)
+* \S: Text symbols. (line 6349)
+* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6227)
+* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6239)
+* \sc: Font styles. (line 730)
+* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \scshape: Font styles. (line 699)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 5157)
+* \sec: Math functions. (line 5520)
+* \section: Sectioning. (line 1402)
+* \seename: Indexes. (line 6807)
* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 799)
-* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 2935)
-* \setlength: \setlength. (line 2981)
-* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 3618)
-* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 2994)
-* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 3002)
-* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 3010)
-* \sf: Font styles. (line 695)
-* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 625)
-* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 3621)
-* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 1914)
-* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 3624)
-* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 3627)
-* \signature: \signature. (line 5170)
-* \sim: Math symbols. (line 3630)
-* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 3633)
-* \sin: Math functions. (line 3885)
-* \sinh: Math functions. (line 3888)
-* \sl: Font styles. (line 698)
-* \slshape: Font styles. (line 622)
-* \small: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 3636)
+ (line 943)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 4213)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 4340)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 5160)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 4353)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 4361)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 4369)
+* \sf: Font styles. (line 733)
+* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 696)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 5166)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 2519)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 5169)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 5172)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 7055)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 5176)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 5179)
+* \sin: Math functions. (line 5523)
+* \sinh: Math functions. (line 5526)
+* \sl: Font styles. (line 736)
+* \sloppy: \sloppy. (line 3320)
+* \slshape: Font styles. (line 693)
+* \small: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 5182)
* \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 4292)
+ (line 6042)
* \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 4292)
-* \smile: Math symbols. (line 3639)
-* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 4196)
-* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 3642)
-* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 3645)
-* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 3648)
-* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math miscellany. (line 3999)
-* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 3651)
-* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 3654)
-* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 3657)
-* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 3660)
+ (line 6042)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 5186)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 5189)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 5192)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 5196)
+* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math miscellany. (line 5662)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 5200)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 5205)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 5210)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 5215)
* \ss (ss): Non-English characters.
- (line 4829)
+ (line 6612)
* \SS (SS): Non-English characters.
- (line 4829)
-* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 4005)
-* \star: Math symbols. (line 3663)
-* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 5176)
-* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 2958)
-* \stop: Command line. (line 5243)
-* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 5183)
-* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 958)
-* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 955)
-* \subset: Math symbols. (line 3666)
-* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 3669)
-* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 956)
-* \succ: Math symbols. (line 3672)
-* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 3675)
-* \sum: Math symbols. (line 3678)
-* \sup: Math functions. (line 3891)
-* \supset: Math symbols. (line 3681)
-* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 3684)
-* \surd: Math symbols. (line 3687)
-* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 3690)
+ (line 6612)
+* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 5668)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 5219)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 4244)
+* \stop: Command line. (line 7136)
+* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 1406)
+* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 1403)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 5226)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 5229)
+* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 1404)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 5232)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 5236)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 5241)
+* \sup: Math functions. (line 5529)
+* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 1328)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 5245)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 5248)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 5251)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 5256)
* \symbol: Reserved characters.
- (line 4505)
-* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 4768)
-* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 4196)
-* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 2047)
-* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 2198)
-* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 4930)
-* \tan: Math functions. (line 3894)
-* \tanh: Math functions. (line 3897)
-* \tau: Math symbols. (line 3693)
-* \telephone: \telephone. (line 5190)
-* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 4571)
-* \textascenderwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4609)
-* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 4574)
-* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 4577)
-* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 4580)
-* \textbackslash: Text symbols. (line 4583)
-* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 4586)
-* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 4589)
-* \textbf: Font styles. (line 616)
-* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 4592)
-* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 4595)
-* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 4598)
-* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 4601)
-* \textcapitalwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4608)
-* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 4604)
-* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4607)
-* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 4522)
-* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 4614)
-* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 4617)
-* \textdollar (or '$'): Text symbols. (line 4620)
-* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 4546)
-* \textemdash (or '---'): Text symbols. (line 4623)
-* \textendash (or '--'): Text symbols. (line 4626)
-* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 4629)
-* \textexclamdown (or '!`'): Text symbols. (line 4632)
-* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 1389)
-* \textfraction: figure. (line 1369)
-* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 4635)
+ (line 6286)
+* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 6550)
+* \TAB: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 5867)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 2658)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 2883)
+* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 6713)
+* \tan: Math functions. (line 5532)
+* \tanh: Math functions. (line 5535)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 5259)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 7079)
+* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 6352)
+* \textascenderwordmark: Text symbols. (line 6390)
+* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 6355)
+* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 6358)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 6361)
+* \textbackslash: Text symbols. (line 6364)
+* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 6367)
+* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 6370)
+* \textbf: Font styles. (line 687)
+* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 6373)
+* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 6376)
+* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 6379)
+* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 6382)
+* \textcapitalwordmark: Text symbols. (line 6389)
+* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 6385)
+* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 6388)
+* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 6303)
+* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 6395)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 6398)
+* \textdollar (or '$'): Text symbols. (line 6401)
+* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 6327)
+* \textemdash (or '---'): Text symbols. (line 6404)
+* \textendash (or '--'): Text symbols. (line 6407)
+* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 6410)
+* \textexclamdown (or '!`'): Text symbols. (line 6413)
+* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 1364)
+* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 1365)
+* \textfraction: Floats. (line 1343)
+* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1344)
+* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 6416)
* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 903)
-* \textit: Font styles. (line 607)
-* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 4641)
-* \textless: Text symbols. (line 4638)
-* \textmd: Font styles. (line 613)
-* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 634)
-* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 4644)
-* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 4645)
-* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 4554)
-* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 4648)
-* \textquestiondown (or '?`'): Text symbols. (line 4651)
-* \textquotedblleft (or '``'): Text symbols. (line 4654)
-* \textquotedblright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 4657)
-* \textquoteleft (or '`'): Text symbols. (line 4660)
-* \textquoteright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 4663)
-* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 4666)
-* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 4667)
-* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 4670)
-* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 4673)
-* \textrm: Font styles. (line 604)
-* \textsc: Font styles. (line 628)
-* \textsf: Font styles. (line 625)
-* \textsl: Font styles. (line 622)
-* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 4558)
-* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 4676)
-* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 4679)
-* \texttt: Font styles. (line 631)
-* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 4682)
-* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 4685)
-* \textup: Font styles. (line 619)
-* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 4688)
+ (line 1200)
+* \textheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1201)
+* \textit: Font styles. (line 681)
+* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 6422)
+* \textless: Text symbols. (line 6419)
+* \textmd: Font styles. (line 684)
+* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 705)
+* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 6425)
+* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 6426)
+* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 6335)
+* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 6429)
+* \textquestiondown (or '?`'): Text symbols. (line 6432)
+* \textquotedblleft (or '``'): Text symbols. (line 6435)
+* \textquotedblright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 6438)
+* \textquoteleft (or '`'): Text symbols. (line 6441)
+* \textquoteright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 6444)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 6447)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 6448)
+* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 6451)
+* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 6454)
+* \textrm: Font styles. (line 678)
+* \textsc: Font styles. (line 699)
+* \textsf: Font styles. (line 696)
+* \textsl: Font styles. (line 693)
+* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 6339)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 6457)
+* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 6460)
+* \texttt: Font styles. (line 702)
+* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 6463)
+* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 6466)
+* \textup: Font styles. (line 690)
+* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 6469)
* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 910)
+ (line 1208)
+* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1209)
* \th (th): Non-English characters.
- (line 4833)
+ (line 6616)
* \TH (TH): Non-English characters.
- (line 4833)
-* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 4083)
-* \theta: Math symbols. (line 3696)
-* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 1856)
-* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 1863)
-* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 4222)
-* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 4155)
-* \tilde: Math accents. (line 3940)
-* \times: Math symbols. (line 3699)
-* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 719)
-* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 4087)
-* \to: Math symbols. (line 3702)
-* \today: \today. (line 4857)
-* \top: Math symbols. (line 3705)
-* \topfraction: figure. (line 1374)
+ (line 6616)
+* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 5746)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 5262)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 2457)
+* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 5603)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 2464)
+* \thinspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 5612)
+* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace. (line 5951)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 5818)
+* \tilde: Math accents. (line 5578)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 5266)
+* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 801)
+* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 5750)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 5270)
+* \today: \today. (line 6640)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 5274)
+* \topfraction: Floats. (line 1348)
+* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1349)
* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
- (line 934)
-* \topsep: itemize. (line 1585)
+ (line 1232)
+* \topsep: itemize. (line 2152)
* \topskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 941)
-* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 3022)
-* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 3708)
-* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 3711)
-* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 3714)
-* \tt: Font styles. (line 701)
-* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 631)
-* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 821)
-* \typein: \typein. (line 5201)
-* \typeout: \typeout. (line 5215)
-* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 4773)
-* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 3137)
-* \underbar: Accents. (line 4776)
-* \underbrace{math}: Math miscellany. (line 4009)
-* \underline{text}: Math miscellany. (line 4012)
-* \unitlength: picture. (line 1687)
-* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 3717)
-* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 3720)
-* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 3723)
-* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 3726)
-* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 3729)
-* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 3732)
-* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 3735)
-* \upshape: Font styles. (line 619)
-* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 3738)
-* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 3741)
-* \usebox: \usebox. (line 4470)
-* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 2910)
+ (line 1239)
+* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1240)
+* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 4381)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 5278)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 5281)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 5287)
+* \tt: Font styles. (line 739)
+* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 702)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 975)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 7094)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 7108)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 6555)
+* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 4507)
+* \underbar: Accents. (line 6558)
+* \underbrace{math}: Math miscellany. (line 5672)
+* \underline{text}: Math miscellany. (line 5675)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 2286)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 5293)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 5300)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 5307)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 5312)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 5316)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 5321)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 5326)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 5331)
+* \upshape: Font styles. (line 690)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 5337)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 5340)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6251)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 4158)
* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 803)
+ (line 951)
* \usepackage: Document class options.
- (line 559)
-* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 4783)
-* \value: \value. (line 2921)
-* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 3744)
-* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 3747)
-* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 3750)
-* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 3753)
-* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 3756)
-* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 3759)
-* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 3762)
-* \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 4017)
-* \vdots <1>: Math miscellany. (line 4018)
-* \vec: Math accents. (line 3943)
-* \vector: \vector. (line 1933)
-* \vee: Math symbols. (line 3765)
-* \verb: \verb. (line 2401)
-* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 3768)
-* \vert: Math symbols. (line 3771)
-* \vfill: \vfill. (line 4299)
-* \vline: \vline. (line 2246)
-* \vspace: \vspace. (line 4306)
-* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 3774)
-* \widehat: Math accents. (line 3946)
-* \widehat <1>: Math accents. (line 3949)
-* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 3016)
-* \wp: Math symbols. (line 3777)
-* \wr: Math symbols. (line 3780)
-* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 3783)
-* \xi: Math symbols. (line 3786)
-* \year: \day \month \year. (line 2964)
-* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 3789)
-* \[: Math formulas. (line 3124)
-* \\ (for 'array'): array. (line 1104)
-* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 1136)
-* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1268)
-* \\ (for 'flushright'): flushright. (line 1491)
-* \\ (for '\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 1928)
-* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1992)
-* \\ for 'flushleft': flushleft. (line 1465)
-* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 5076)
-* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 2109)
-* \\ for 'verse': verse. (line 2429)
-* \\ for '\author': \maketitle. (line 4074)
-* \\ for '\title': \maketitle. (line 4088)
-* \\ force line break: \\. (line 2449)
-* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1273)
-* \]: Math formulas. (line 3124)
+ (line 633)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 6566)
+* \value: \value. (line 4184)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 5343)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 5348)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 5352)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 5356)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 5360)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 5364)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 5368)
+* \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 5680)
+* \vdots <1>: Math miscellany. (line 5681)
+* \vec: Math accents. (line 5581)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 2538)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 5372)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 3189)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 5377)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 5393)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6049)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 2974)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6075)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 5411)
+* \widehat: Math accents. (line 5584)
+* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 5587)
+* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 4375)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 5415)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 5418)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 5421)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 5424)
+* \year: \day \month \year. (line 4251)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 5427)
+* \[: Math formulas. (line 4494)
+* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 1617)
+* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1871)
+* \\ (for 'flushright'): flushright. (line 2058)
+* \\ (for '\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 2533)
+* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2603)
+* \\ for 'flushleft': flushleft. (line 2032)
+* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 6877)
+* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 2746)
+* \\ for 'verse': verse. (line 3217)
+* \\ for '\author': \maketitle. (line 5737)
+* \\ for '\title': \maketitle. (line 5751)
+* \\ force line break: \\. (line 3236)
+* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1879)
+* \]: Math formulas. (line 4494)
* \^: Reserved characters.
- (line 4501)
-* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 4721)
+ (line 6282)
+* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 6502)
* \_: Reserved characters.
- (line 4491)
-* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 4725)
-* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2019)
+ (line 6272)
+* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 6506)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2630)
* \{: Reserved characters.
- (line 4491)
-* \|: Math symbols. (line 3164)
+ (line 6272)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 4564)
* \}: Reserved characters.
- (line 4491)
+ (line 6272)
* \~: Reserved characters.
- (line 4501)
-* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 4731)
+ (line 6282)
+* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 6512)
* ^: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 3150)
+ (line 4521)
* _: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 3150)
+ (line 4521)
* {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 435)
+ (line 444)
* a4paper option: Document class options.
- (line 503)
+ (line 557)
* a5paper option: Document class options.
- (line 503)
-* abstract environment: abstract. (line 1072)
-* array environment: array. (line 1083)
-* article class: Document classes. (line 464)
+ (line 557)
+* abstract environment: abstract. (line 1535)
+* array environment: array. (line 1547)
+* article class: Document classes. (line 515)
* b5paper option: Document class options.
- (line 503)
-* book class: Document classes. (line 464)
-* bottomnumber: figure. (line 1395)
-* center environment: center. (line 1129)
+ (line 557)
+* book class: Document classes. (line 515)
+* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 1371)
+* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1372)
+* bp: Units of length. (line 4304)
+* cc: Units of length. (line 4317)
+* center environment: center. (line 1605)
* clock option to 'slides' class: Document class options.
- (line 556)
-* dbltopnumber: figure. (line 1399)
-* description environment: description. (line 1166)
-* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 1189)
-* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 3114)
-* document environment: document. (line 1209)
+ (line 630)
+* cm: Units of length. (line 4308)
+* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 1375)
+* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1376)
+* dd: Units of length. (line 4314)
+* description environment: description. (line 1671)
+* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 1711)
+* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 4484)
+* document environment: document. (line 1754)
* draft option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
-* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 347)
-* dvips command: Output files. (line 347)
-* dvitype command: Output files. (line 347)
-* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 1215)
-* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 1253)
-* equation environment: equation. (line 1288)
-* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 3114)
-* etex command: TeX engines. (line 395)
+ (line 582)
+* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 351)
+* dvips command: Output files. (line 351)
+* dvitype command: Output files. (line 351)
+* em: Units of length. (line 4322)
+* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 1786)
+* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 1848)
+* equation environment: equation. (line 1904)
+* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 4484)
+* etex command: TeX engines. (line 399)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 4322)
* executivepaper option: Document class options.
- (line 503)
-* figure: figure. (line 1301)
-* filecontents: filecontents. (line 1416)
+ (line 557)
+* figure: figure. (line 1922)
+* filecontents: filecontents. (line 1975)
* final option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
+ (line 582)
* first-latex-doc document: About this document.
- (line 274)
+ (line 277)
* fleqn option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
-* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 1459)
-* flushright environment: flushright. (line 1485)
+ (line 582)
+* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 2026)
+* flushright environment: flushright. (line 2052)
* <http://home.gna.org/latexrefman> home page: About this document.
- (line 247)
-* indexspace: Indexes. (line 5036)
-* itemize environment: itemize. (line 1511)
+ (line 250)
+* in: Units of length. (line 4301)
+* inch: Units of length. (line 4301)
+* indexspace: Indexes. (line 6819)
+* itemize environment: itemize. (line 2078)
* landscape option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
-* latex command: Output files. (line 347)
+ (line 582)
+* latex command: Output files. (line 351)
* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document.
- (line 271)
+ (line 274)
* <latexrefman-discuss@gna.org> email address: About this document.
- (line 258)
+ (line 261)
* legalpaper option: Document class options.
- (line 503)
+ (line 557)
* leqno option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
-* letter: letter. (line 1613)
-* letter class: Document classes. (line 464)
+ (line 582)
+* letter class: Document classes. (line 515)
+* letter environment: letter. (line 2180)
* letterpaper option: Document class options.
- (line 503)
-* list: list. (line 1618)
-* lR box: picture. (line 1743)
-* lrbox: lrbox. (line 4355)
+ (line 557)
+* list: list. (line 2185)
+* lR box: picture. (line 2342)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6136)
* lshort document: About this document.
- (line 281)
-* lualatex command: TeX engines. (line 412)
-* math environment: math. (line 1643)
-* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 3114)
-* minipage environment: minipage. (line 1655)
+ (line 284)
+* lualatex command: TeX engines. (line 416)
+* math environment: math. (line 2242)
+* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 4484)
+* minipage environment: minipage. (line 2254)
+* mm: Units of length. (line 4311)
+* mu: Units of length. (line 4333)
* notitlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
+ (line 582)
* onecolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 535)
+ (line 609)
* oneside option: Document class options.
- (line 535)
+ (line 609)
* openany option: Document class options.
- (line 535)
+ (line 609)
* openbib option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
+ (line 582)
* openright option: Document class options.
- (line 535)
-* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 357)
-* picture: picture. (line 1683)
-* printindex: Indexes. (line 5032)
-* quotation: quotation. (line 1944)
-* quote: quote. (line 1959)
-* report class: Document classes. (line 464)
-* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 990)
-* slides class: Document classes. (line 464)
-* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 1974)
-* table: table. (line 2065)
-* tabular environment: tabular. (line 2092)
-* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 4517)
-* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 2253)
-* theorem environment: theorem. (line 2354)
-* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 2367)
+ (line 609)
+* pc: Units of length. (line 4298)
+* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 361)
+* picture: picture. (line 2282)
+* printindex: Indexes. (line 6815)
+* pt: Units of length. (line 4294)
+* quotation: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
+* quote: quotation and quote.
+ (line 2549)
+* report class: Document classes. (line 515)
+* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 1438)
+* slides class: Document classes. (line 515)
+* sp: Units of length. (line 4320)
+* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 2585)
+* table: table. (line 2676)
+* tabular environment: tabular. (line 2718)
+* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 6298)
+* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 3040)
+* theorem environment: theorem. (line 3142)
+* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 3155)
* titlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 508)
-* topnumber: figure. (line 1403)
-* totalnumber: figure. (line 1407)
+ (line 582)
+* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1233)
+* topnumber: Floats. (line 1379)
+* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1380)
+* totalnumber: Floats. (line 1383)
+* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1384)
* twocolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 535)
+ (line 609)
* twoside option: Document class options.
- (line 535)
+ (line 609)
* usrguide official documentation: About this document.
- (line 277)
-* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 2384)
-* verse environment: verse. (line 2418)
-* xdvi command: Output files. (line 347)
-* xelatex command: TeX engines. (line 421)
+ (line 280)
+* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 3172)
+* verse environment: verse. (line 3206)
+* xdvi command: Output files. (line 351)
+* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 425)
+* xelatex command: TeX engines. (line 425)